Toyota 2017 RAV4 HV Owner's Manual

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

1

For safety and security

2

Instrument cluster

Make sure to read through them

How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of warning lights and indicators, etc.

3

Operation of each component

Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving, etc.

4

Driving

Operations and advice which are necessary for driving

5

Audio system

Operating the audio system

6

Interior features

Usage of the interior features, etc.

7

Maintenance and care

8

When trouble arises

9

Vehicle specifications

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures

What to do in case of malfunction or emergency

10

For owners

Index

Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.

Reporting safety defects for US owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

Search by symptom

Search alphabetically

RAV4-HV_OM_OM42B03U_(U)

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information....................... 8

Reading this manual .................... 14

How to search.............................. 15

Pictorial index .............................. 16

1


1-1. For safe use

Before driving ...................... 26

For safe driving ................... 28

Seat belts ............................ 30

SRS airbags ........................ 38

Front passenger occupant

classification system ......... 51

Safety information for children ........................ 58

Child restraint systems........ 59

Installing child restraints...... 63

Exhaust gas precautions..... 74

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features ....... 75

Hybrid system

precautions ....................... 79

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system ............. 84

2


2.


Warning lights

and indicators .................... 88

Gauges and meters ............. 93

Multi-information display...... 97

Energy monitor/

consumption screen ........ 101

3


3-1. Key information

Keys................................... 108

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors ......................... 113

Back door .......................... 119

Smart key system .............. 136

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats......................... 144

Rear seats ......................... 146

Driving position memory .... 149

Head restraints .................. 151

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel................... 154

Inside rear view mirror ....... 156

Outside rear view

mirrors ............................. 158

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows.................. 161

Moon roof .......................... 164


3

4

Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle............. 168

Cargo and luggage............ 178

Vehicle load limits ............. 182

Trailer towing..................... 183

Dinghy towing.................... 197

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch ...... 198

EV drive mode................... 203

Hybrid transmission........... 205

Turn signal lever................ 211

Parking brake .................... 212

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch ................ 213

Automatic High Beam ....... 217

Fog light switch ................. 222

Windshield wipers

and washer ..................... 223

Rear window wiper

and washer ..................... 227

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank

cap................................... 230

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense P...... 233

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) ........................... 240

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

with steering control) ....... 255

Dynamic radar cruise

control.............................. 264

Cruise control .................... 276

Intuitive parking assist ....... 280

Rear view monitor

system ............................. 288

BSM

(Blind Spot Monitor)......... 298

• The Blind Spot Monitor

function.......................... 302

• The Rear Cross Traffic

Alert function ................. 305

Driving assist systems ....... 308

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving

tips................................... 314

Winter driving tips .............. 317

Utility vehicle precautions...................... 321

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5

Audio system

5-1. Basic Operations

Audio system types ........... 328

Audio system..................... 329

Steering wheel audio switches .......................... 333

AUX port/USB port ............ 334

Basic audio operations...... 335

5-2. Setup

Setup menu....................... 337

General settings ................ 338

Audio settings.................... 341

Display settings ................. 342

Voice settings.................... 344

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting the audio

source ............................. 345

List screen operation......... 346

Optimal use of the audio

system............................. 348

5-4. Using the radio

Radio operation................. 349

5-5. Playing an audio CD and

MP3/WMA/AAC discs

CD player operation .......... 351

CD player and disc

information ...................... 352

5-6. Using an external device

iPod player operation ........ 358

USB memory device

player operation .............. 363

Using the AUX port ........... 368

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth

®

Preparations to use wireless

communication ................ 369

Registering a Bluetooth

® audio player for the

first time........................... 372


® phone for the

first time........................... 373


®

device .............................. 374

Connecting a Bluetooth

®

device .............................. 376

Displaying a Bluetooth

®

device details................... 378

Detailed Bluetooth

®

settings ............................ 379

5-8. Bluetooth

®

Audio

Listening to Bluetooth

®

Audio ............................... 381

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

Using a Bluetooth

®

Phone .............................. 383

Making a call...................... 385

Receiving a call ................. 388

Speaking on the phone...... 389

Bluetooth

®

phone

message function ............ 392

Using the steering

wheel switches ................ 397

Bluetooth

®

phone

settings ............................ 398


5

5-10. Phonebook

Contact/Call History

Settings ........................... 400

5-11. Bluetooth

®

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting)............ 410

Bluetooth

®

......................... 414

5-12. Other function

Voice command

system............................. 420

6


6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning

system............................. 426

Heated steering wheel/seat heaters .......... 434

• Heated steering

wheel ............................ 435

• Seat heaters ................. 435

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ................ 436

• Interior lights ................. 437

• Personal lights .............. 437

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features...... 439

• Glove box...................... 440

• Console box .................. 440

• Cup holders .................. 441

• Bottle holders ................ 442

• Auxiliary box ................. 442

Luggage compartment features ........................... 443

6-4. Using the other interior features

Other interior features........ 453

• Sun visors .................... 453

• Vanity mirrors ............... 453

• Power outlets ................ 454

• Armrest.......................... 455

• Coat hooks .................... 455

• Assist grips ................... 456

Garage door opener .......... 457

Compass ........................... 464

7


7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior .......... 470


the vehicle interior ........... 473

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements ................... 476

General maintenance ........ 479

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)

programs ......................... 482

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions ..................... 483

Hood.................................. 485

Positioning a floor jack ...... 487

Engine compartment ......... 488

12-volt battery ................... 496

Tires .................................. 501

Tire inflation pressure........ 510

Wheels .............................. 513

Air conditioning filter.......... 516

Electronic key battery........ 518

Checking and replacing

fuses ............................... 520

Light bulbs......................... 523

8


8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers........... 538

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....................... 539

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs

to be towed...................... 540

If you think

something is wrong ......... 546

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer

sounds............................. 547

If a warning message is

displayed ......................... 556

If you have a flat tire .......... 576

If the hybrid system

will not start ..................... 588

If the electronic key does

not operate properly ........ 590

If the 12-volt battery

is discharged ................... 592

If your vehicle overheats.... 597

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ................................ 602


7

9


9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) .......... 606

Fuel information ................ 615

Tire information ................. 618

9-2. Customization

Customizable features ...... 631

9-3. Initialization

Items to initialize................ 641

10

For owners

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners........................ 644

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French) ............................... 645

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

(in French) ............................... 647

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting) .................... 658

Alphabetical index...................... 661

For vehicles with Entune Premium Audio with Navigation or Entune

Audio Plus, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the equipment listed below.

• Navigation system

• Audio system

• Rear view monitor system

• Toyota parking assist monitor

• Panoramic view monitor

10

7

8

9

5

6

1

2

3

4


8

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system

Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.


Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

● Dynamic radar cruise control system

● Cruise control system

● Anti-lock brake system

● SRS airbag system

● Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.

Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.

9


10

Vehicle data recordings

Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

• Engine speed

• Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)

• Accelerator status

• Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Shift position

• Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.

●

Data Transmission

Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Toyota without notification to you.

●

Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

●

To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.


11

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

●

Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained



However, if necessary, Toyota may:

• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance

• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner


12

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

WARNING

■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■ General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.



13

14

Reading this manual

1 2 3

WARNING:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people.

NOTICE:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.

Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order.

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Indicates the component or position being explained.

Means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.


How to search

■ Searching by name

• Alphabetical index .......P. 661

■ Searching by installation position

• Pictorial index................P. 16

■ Searching by symptom or sound

• What to do if...

(Troubleshooting) ........P. 658

■ Searching by title

• Table of contents .............P. 2

15


16

Pictorial index

Pictorial index

■

Exterior

1

2

3

Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 113

Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 113

Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . P. 590

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 558

Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 119

Opening from inside the cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 119

Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 120


Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 429


Pictorial index

17

4

5

6

7

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 223

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 317

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . P. 429

Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 472

Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 230

Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 230

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 608

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 501

Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 613

Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 317

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system *

. . . . . . . . P. 501

Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 576

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 485

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 485

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 609

Coping with overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 597

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P. 523, Watts: P. 614)

14

15

10

11

8

9

12

13

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 222

Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211

Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

Stop/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

Hill-start assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 308

License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

16

Headlights/daytime running lights *

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

Parking lights/daytime running lights

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

Back-up lights

Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205

Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

* : If equipped


18

Pictorial index

■

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

Power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 198

Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes . . . . . . . P. 198, 199

Emergency stop of the hybrid system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 539

When the hybrid system will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 588


Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205

Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205

Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 540

When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209

Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 93

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . P. 93

Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 88

When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 547

Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 97

Energy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 101

When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 556

Parking brake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 212

Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 212

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 318

Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 561


Pictorial index

19

6

7

Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211

Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights. . . . P. 213

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 222

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 223

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 223, 227

Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 495

Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 567

8

9

Hood lock release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 485

10

Automatic air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 426

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 426

Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 429

Audio system

Entune Audio

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 328

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 329

Entune Audio Plus/Entune Premium Audio with Navigation

* 1, 2

11 Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 232

* 1

: If equipped

* 2

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.


20

Pictorial index

■

Switches

1

2

3

Outside rear view mirror switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

Instrument panel light control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 94

8

9

10

6

7

4

5

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) switch

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 255

Heated steering wheel switch

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 435

Power back door switch

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 119

Driving position memory switches

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 149

Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161

Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 115

Window lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161

Tire pressure warning reset switch

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 503


Pictorial index

21

1

5

6

2

3

4

Audio remote control switches * 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 333

Telephone switches * 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 397

Meter control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 98

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 264

Cruise control switch

Cruise control * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 276

Dynamic radar cruise control

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 264

Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . P. 154

Talk switch * 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 420

* 1

: If equipped

* 2



22

Pictorial index

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 538

Panoramic view monitor switch * 1, 2

VSC OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 310

EV drive mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 203

Driving mode select switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206

Seat heater switches * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 434

Windshield wiper de-icer switch * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 429

AUX port/USB port * 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 334


Pictorial index

23

■

Interior

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 26

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 144

Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146

Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 151

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 30

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 440

Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 115

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 441

Bottle holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 442

Assist grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 456

* 1

: If equipped

* 2



24

Pictorial index

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 442

Interior lights

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 437

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 437

Moon roof switches

* 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 164

Vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 453

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 453

Compass

* 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 464

Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 156

Garage door opener switches

* 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 457

* 1

: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

* 2

: If equipped



1

1-1. For safe use

Before driving...................... 26

For safe driving ................... 28

Seat belts ............................ 30

SRS airbags........................ 38


classification system ......... 51

Safety information for children ........................ 58

Child restraint systems........ 59

Installing child restraints...... 63

Exhaust gas precautions..... 74

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features ....... 75

Hybrid system

precautions ....................... 79

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system ............. 84

25


26

1-1. For safe use

Before driving

Floor mat

1

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

*

: Always align the marks.

*

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.


1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When installing the driver’s floor mat

● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.

● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.

● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

■ Before driving

● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

● With the hybrid system stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

27

1


28

1-1. For safe use

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

1

Correct driving posture

Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (

→

P. 144)

2 Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (

→

P. 144)

3

4

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (

→

P. 151)

Wear the seat belt correctly. (

→

P. 30)

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (

→ P. 30)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

(

→ P. 59)

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (

→

P. 156, 158)


1-1. For safe use

WARNING


Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.

● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.

Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

29

1


30

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

●

Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

●

Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

●

Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

●

Do not twist the seat belt.

1

Fastening and releasing the seat belt (except for the rear center seat)

To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.

2 To release the seat belt, press the release button.

Release button


1-1. For safe use

1

Fastening the seat belt (for the rear center seat)

Press plate “B” to release. Then pull the seat belt down toward the rear seat bottom cushion.

Plate “B”

31

1

2 Push plate “A” into buckle “A” until a clicking sound is heard.

Plate “A”

3 Push plate “B” into buckle “B” until a clicking sound is heard.

Plate “B”

Buckle “A”

Buckle “B”


32

1-1. For safe use

1

Releasing and stowing the seat belt (for the rear center seat)

To release the hooked buckle

“B”, push the release button.

2 To release the hooked plate

“A”, insert the plate “B” or mechanical key (

→

P. 108) into

the hole on the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, retract it slowly.

Release button

3

1

Stow the plates in the holder.

Put plate “A” and “B” together, and then stow the plates in the holder.

2 Fully insert the plates all the way.

3 Push down the plate until a click is heard to lock it.


1-1. For safe use

1

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button.

2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.

33

1


34

1-1. For safe use

■

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (

→ P. 63)

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (

→

P. 59)

●

When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (

→ P. 30)

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.


1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at one time, including children.

● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

→ P. 30)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

→ P. 30)

35

1


36

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■ Seat belt pretensioners

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. ( →

P. 33)

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.

Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.


1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ When using the rear center seat belt

Do not use the rear center seat belt with either buckle released. Fastening only one of the buckles may result in death or serious injury in case of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■ Using a seat belt extender

● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

37

1


38

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.


1-1. For safe use

39

◆

SRS front airbags

1 SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components

2 SRS driver knee airbag

Can help provide driver protection

3 SRS seat cushion airbag

Can help restrain the front passenger

◆

SRS side and curtain shield airbags

4

5

SRS side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS curtain shield airbags

●

Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

●

Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover

1


40

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbag system components

1

5

6

2

3

4

7

8

9

Side impact sensors (front doors)

Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbags

Front passenger’s seat cushion airbag

Side airbags

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator lights

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

SRS warning light

Driver airbag

14

15

16

12

13

10

11

Side impact sensors (rear)

Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters

Driver’s seat position sensor

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Driver knee airbag

Front impact sensors

17

Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

Airbag sensor assembly


1-1. For safe use

41

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

1

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.


● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, nonslippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.


42

1-1. For safe use

WARNING


● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. ( →

P. 59)

● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.


WARNING


● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

1-1. For safe use

43

1

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

● Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.


44

1-1. For safe use

WARNING


● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags and seat cushion airbag from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags and seat cushion airbag to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.


1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper or side of the occupant compartment

● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or roof luggage carrier

● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players

● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

45

1

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.


46

1-1. For safe use

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 -

18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.

● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (

→ P. 51)

● The SRS seat cushion airbag on the front passenger’s seat will not operate if the occupant is not wearing a seat belt.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

●

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

●

The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.

●

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.


1-1. For safe use

47

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

● Landing hard or falling

1

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.

● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal

● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone

■

Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

●

Collision from the side

●

Collision from the rear

●

Vehicle rollover


48

1-1. For safe use

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or lowspeed frontal collision.

●


●

Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

●


●

Pitching end over end


1-1. For safe use

49

■ When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

1

●

A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the

SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

●

The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The front passenger’s seat cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.


50

1-1. For safe use

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.


1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification system

51

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

1

1

2

3

4

Seat belt reminder light

SRS warning light

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light


52

1-1. For safe use

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult * 1

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light


“AIR BAG ON”

Off

Off

* 2 or flashing * 3

Devices


Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Activated

Front passenger seat cushion airbag

Activated

* 2 or deactivated * 3

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner and force limiter

Activated


1-1. For safe use

53

■ Child * 4



SRS warning light


“AIR BAG OFF” or

“AIR BAG ON” * 4

Off

Off

* 2 or flashing

* 3

Deactivated or activated

* 4

Devices




Activated



■ Child restraint system with infant * 5



SRS warning light


Deactivated or activated

* 2, 4

Activated

“AIR BAG

OFF”

Off

* 6

Off

* 2 or flashing

* 3

Deactivated

Devices






Activated

Deactivated

Activated

1


54

1-1. For safe use

■ Unoccupied



SRS warning light


Devices






“AIR BAG OFF”

Off

Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated

Activated


■ There is a malfunction in the system



SRS warning light


1-1. For safe use

“AIR BAG OFF”

On

55

1

Devices





Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated


Activated

* 1

: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

* 2

: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.

* 3

: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

* 4

: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.

* 5

: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (

→

P. 59)

* 6

: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (

→

P. 63)


56

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.


● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.

seatback pockets).

● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.


1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. ( →

P. 63)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your

Toyota dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

57

1


58

1-1. For safe use

Safety information for children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.

● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally. (

→

P. 116, 161)

● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, back door, seats etc.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof (if equipped) or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.


1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

59

1

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.

●

Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

●

For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(

→

P. 63)


60

1-1. For safe use

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child:

 Rear facing

⎯

Infant seat/convertible seat

 Forward facing

⎯

Convertible seat

 Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (

→ P. 30)


1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Child restraint precautions

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

This may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.

Always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

61

1


62

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Child restraint precautions

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■ When the child restraint system is not in use

● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.


1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions.

Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

63

1

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism

(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (

→ P. 34)

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

An anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat. (Labels displaying the location of the anchor bracket.)


64

1-1. For safe use

1

Installation with LATCH system

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.

(

→

P. 151)

2 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

 Type A

3 Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

When installing the child restraint system with the head restraint being raised, be sure to have the top tether strap pass underneath the head restraint.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only


1-1. For safe use

65

3

4

 Type B

Latch the buckles onto the

LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

When installing the child restraint system with the head restraint being raised, be sure to have the top tether strap pass underneath the head restraint.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

If there is gap between the child restraint system and the seatback, adjust the seatback until good contact is achieved. ( → P. 148)

1


66

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear-facing

⎯

Infant seat/convertible seat

1

1

Adjust the seatback to the

3rd lock position from the most upright position.

(

→

P. 146)

Most upright position

2 3rd lock position

2

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint. (

→

P. 151)

Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.


4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

5 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

1-1. For safe use

67

1


68

1-1. For safe use

■ Forward-facing

⎯

Convertible seat

1

1

2



(

→

P. 146)


3rd lock position

2

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint. ( →

P. 151)

Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.


1-1. For safe use

69

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

5

6

While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. ( → P. 71)

1


70

1-1. For safe use

■ Booster seat

1

1

2



(

→

P. 146)


3rd lock position

2

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint. ( →

P. 151)

Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

 Booster type  High back type

3 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (

→

P. 30)


1-1. For safe use

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

71

1

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap

1

Secure the child restraint system using the seat belt or

LATCH anchors.

2

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

Run the top tether strap under the head restraint.

Top tether strap

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.


72

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (

→ P. 34)

■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

● Only put a forward-facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).


1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ When installing a child restraint system

● When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. if it dose not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

73

1


74

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

● Keep the back door closed.

● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back door is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ When parking

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the hybrid system.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

■ Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.


1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate it with care.

The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

75

1

1

2

3

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

Gasoline engine

Front electric motor (traction motor)

Rear electric motor (traction motor)


76

1-2. Hybrid system

◆

When stopped/during start off

The gasoline engine stops * when the vehicle is stopped. During start off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped * and the electric motor (traction motor) is used.

When the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) is not being charged.

*

: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) requires charging or the engine is warming up, etc., the gasoline engine will not automatically stop.

(

→

P. 77)

◆

During normal driving

The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor

(traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary.

◆

When accelerating sharply

When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).

◆

When braking (regenerative braking)

The wheels operate the electric motor (traction motor) as a power generator, and the hybrid battery (traction battery) is charged.

Vehicle proximity notification system

When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).


1-2. Hybrid system

77

■

Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery).

● The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift lever in D or S.

● The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift lever in D or S.

■ EV indicator

The EV indicator comes on when the vehicle is driven using only the electric motor (traction motor) or the gasoline engine is stopped.

1

■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:

● During gasoline engine warm-up

● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging

● When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low

● When the heater is switched on

■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery (traction battery) will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes fully discharged and you are unable to start the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

→ P. 594


78

1-2. Hybrid system

■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or when the terminal has been removed and installed during exchange, etc.

The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your

Toyota dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sound or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move with the “READY” indicator is illuminated. For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift lever to P when parked.

The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction:

● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.

● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) when the hybrid system starts or stops.

● Relay operating sounds such as a snap or soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid battery (traction battery), behind the rear seats, when the hybrid system is started or stopped.

● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the back door is open.

● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine starts or stops, when driving at low speeds, or during idling.

● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.

● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed or as the accelerator pedal is released.

● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.

● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vents on the lower sides of the rear seat.

■ Vehicle proximity notification system

In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be difficult for surrounding people to hear.

● In very noisy areas

● In the wind or the rain

Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle compared to the front.

■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal

Contact your Toyota dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV indicator) can be changed.

(Customizable features →

P. 632)


1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system precautions

Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system (about 650V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating.

Obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.

79

1

1

2

3

4

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

Warning label

High voltage cables (orange)

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Rear electric motor (traction motor)

7

8

5

6

Service plug

Front electric motor (traction motor)

Power control unit

Air conditioning compressor


80

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake and discharge vents

The cooling air intake and discharge vents for the hybrid battery

(traction battery) are located under the rear seats and between the rear seats and deck board, respectively. If the air intake vents are blocked, it could lead to a reduction in hybrid battery (traction battery) output.

The hybrid battery (traction battery) output will not be reduced, even if the space between the upper part of the air discharge vents on the back of the rear seat and deck board is blocked with luggage, etc.

Air intake vents

Air discharge vents

Emergency shut off system

When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart.

To restart the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.

Hybrid warning message

A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.

If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (

→

P. 556)


1-2. Hybrid system

81

■ If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12volt battery is disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In this case, try to start the system again. If the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light (

→ P. 549) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the

hybrid system may not be able to start. (The standard amount of fuel is about

2.7 gal. [10.1 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.], when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope. Add extra fuel when the vehicle is inclined.)

■ Electromagnetic waves

● High voltage parts and cables on hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.

● Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts.

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions.

WARNING

■ High voltage precautions

This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.

● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their connectors.

● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.

● Never try to open the service plug access hole located under the rear seat.

The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.

1


82

1-2. Hybrid system

WARNING

■ Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:

● Pull your vehicle off the road, apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, and turn the hybrid system off.

● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.

● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.

● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.

● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible.

Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous.

● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with four wheels raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause a fire. ( →

P. 540)

● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.


1-2. Hybrid system

WARNING

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)

● Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Toyota dealer. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.

Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death or serious injury:

• The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.

• The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.

When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these dangers.

● If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your

Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.

83

1

NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vents

● Do not place objects that will block the air intake vents. The hybrid battery

(traction battery) may overheat and be damaged.

● Clean the air intake vents regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from overheating.

● Do not get water or foreign materials in the air intake vents as this may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).

● Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.


84

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

The indicator light flashes after the power switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

■

Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle



■ Certifications for the immobilizer system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

85

1

 For vehicles sold in Canada


86


WARNING

■ Certifications for the immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.



2

2.


Warning lights

and indicators ................... 88

Gauges and meters ............ 93

Multi-information display ..... 97

Energy monitor/

consumption screen........ 101

87


88

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.



89

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems.

* 1

Brake system warning light (

→

P. 547)

(U.S.A.)

* 1

Brake system warning light ( →

P. 547)

(red)

(Canada)

* 1

Brake system warning light (

→

P. 547)

(yellow)

* 1

Malfunction indicator lamp ( →

P. 547)

(U.S.A.)

* 1

Malfunction indicator lamp (

→

P. 547)

(Canada)

* 1

SRS warning light

( →

P. 547)

* 1, 2

PCS warning light

(

→

P. 548)

(if equipped)

* 1

* 1

Slip indicator ( →

P. 549)

Low fuel level warning light (

→

P. 549)


(

→ P. 549)

Master warning light

(

→

P. 549)

* 1

Tire pressure warning light (

→ P. 549)

(if equipped)

* 1

ABS warning light

(

→

P. 548)

(U.S.A.)

* 1

ABS warning light

( →

P. 548)

(Canada)

* 1

Electric power steering system warning light

(

→

P. 548)

(amber)

(if equipped)

* 3

LDA warning light

(

→

P. 550)

Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights

(

→ P. 549)

2


90


* 1

: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode, to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

* 2

: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.

* 3

: This light illuminates on the center panel.



91

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

( →

P. 211)

* 1

VSC OFF indicator

(

→ P. 310)

(U.S.A.)

Headlight indicator

(

→

P. 213)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator

( →

P. 213)

Headlight high beam indicator (

→

P. 215)

“READY” indicator

(

→

P. 198)

* 1, 3

PCS warning light

(

→ P. 245)

(if equipped)

* 4

Security indicator

(

→

P. 84)

2

(if equipped)

Automatic High Beam indicator ( → P. 217)

(if equipped)

Fog light indicator

( →

P. 222)

(if equipped)

Cruise control indicator

( →

P. 264, 276)

(if equipped)

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator

( →

P. 264)

“SPORT” indicator

(

→ P. 206)

“ECO MODE” indicator

(

→ P. 206)

EV indicator ( →

P. 77)

EV drive mode indicator

(

→ P. 203)

Cruise control “SET” indicator (

→

P. 264, 276)

(if equipped)

Intuitive parking assist indicator (

→

P. 280)

* 1, 2

Slip indicator (

→ P. 309)

(if equipped)

LDA indicator

(

→

P. 258)


92


* 5

Ice warning indicator

( →

P. 567)

* 6, 7 BSM outside rear view mirror indicators

(

→ P. 298)

BSM indicator (

→ P. 298)

(if equipped)

* 1, 4 “AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator ( →

P. 51)

(if equipped)

* 1 : These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode, to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

* 2 : The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

* 3 : The light comes on when the system is turned off.

* 4 : This light illuminates on the center panel.

* 5 : When the outside temperature is approximately 37 ° F (3 ° C) or lower, the indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

* 6 : In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate in the following situations:

• When the power switch is turned to ON mode while the system is set to on.

• When the system is set to on while the power switch is in ON mode.

If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will turn off after a few seconds.

If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system. If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

* 7 : This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.

WARNING

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.


Gauges and meters


93

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target region.

Hybrid System Indicator

Displays hybrid system power output or regeneration level (

→

P. 95)

Outside temperature display

→

P. 95

Shift position and shift range

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range ( →

P. 205)

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Odometer and trip meter display

Odometer:

Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (

→ P. 97)

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature


2

94


Changing the odometer and trip meter display

Switches the items of the odometer and trip meter display by pressing the “TRIP” switch.

When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the “TRIP” switch will reset the trip meter.

Instrument panel light control

1

2

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turning the dial.

Brighter

Darker



95

■

The meters and display illuminate when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Hybrid System Indicator

1 Charge area

Shows that energy is being recovered via the regenerative brake.

2 Hybrid Eco area

Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often.

3

4

The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.

Eco area

Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.)

● By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.

● Charge area indicates regeneration * status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery).

*

: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.

■ Outside temperature display

● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/ exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

● When “--” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning.

Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

● The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40 ° F (-40 ° C) to 122 ° F

(50

°

C).

■

Pop-up display

In some situations, a pop-up display will be temporarily displayed on the multi-information display.

The pop-up display function can be set on/off. ( →

P. 99)

2


96


WARNING

■ The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in personal death or injury.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (“H”). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. ( →

P. 597)



97

Multi-information display

Display contents

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data.

●

Menu icons

Displays the following information when an icon is selected.

(

→

P. 98)

Some of the information may be displayed automatically depending on the situation.

Drive information

Select to display various drive data. ( →

P. 98)

Navigation system-linked display *

Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.

• Route guidance

• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)

Audio system-linked display

Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the display using the meter control switches.

Driving assist information *

Select to display the dynamic radar cruise control

*

or LDA (Lane

Departure Alert with steering control) * information, when the system is used. (

→

P. 255, 264)

The displayed icon changes depending on the system used.

Warning message display

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected. (

→

P. 556)

Settings display

Select to change the system settings and meter display settings.

(

→

P. 99)

*

: If equipped

2


98


Operating the meter control switches

2

3

1

The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.

Enter/Set

Select an item/change pages

Return to the previous screen

Drive information

Items displayed can be switched by pressing or of the meter control switches to select and pressing or .

■ Energy monitor

→

P. 101

■ Average fuel economy (after start/after reset * /after refuel)

Displays the average fuel consumption since the hybrid system was started, the function was reset and the vehicle was refueled, respectively

■

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

Average speed (after start/after reset * /after refuel)

Displays the average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started, the function was reset and the vehicle was refueled, respectively

■ Range (after refuel)

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining

• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch off, the display may not be updated.



99

■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) vehicle sway warning (if equipped)

→

P. 255

■ Display off

A blank screen is displayed

*

: The function can be reset by pressing and holding the of the meter control switches when the reset item is displayed.

Settings display

The settings of the following items can be changed, refer to P. 631

For functions that can be enabled or disabled, the function switches between on and off each time is pressed.

●

(Lane Departure Alert with steering control) * (

→

P. 255)

●

(Pre-Collision System) * (

→

P. 240)

●

●

(Blind Spot Monitor) * (

→

P. 298)

(Intuitive parking assist) * (

→

P. 280)

●

(Power back door) * (

→

P. 123)

●

Vehicle maintenance *

The maintenance data should be reset. ( →

P. 477)

●

Meter Settings

• Language

Select to change the language on the display.

• Units

Select to change the unit of measure for fuel consumption.

• EV indicator

Select to activate/deactivate the EV indicator

• Pop-up display

Select to set the pop-up displays, which may appear in some situations, on/off.

• Accent color

Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the cursor color.

• Default settings

Registered or changed meter settings will be deleted or returned to their default setting.

*

: If equipped

2


100


■ System check display

After turning the power switch to ON mode, opening image is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check is complete, the normal screen will return.

■ Suspension of the settings display

In the following situations, the settings display using the meter control switches will be suspended.

● When a warning message appears on the multi-information display

● When the vehicle begins to move

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting 12-volt battery terminals

The drive information will be reset.

■ Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

WARNING

■ Caution for use while driving

For safety, avoid operating the meter control switch while driving as much as possible, and do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving. Stop the vehicle and operate the meter control switch. Failure to do so may cause a steering wheel operation error, resulting in an unexpected accident.

■ Cautions during setting up the display

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■ During setting up the display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while setting up the display features.



Energy monitor/consumption screen

101

You can view the status of your vehicle on the multi-information display and the audio system screen (if equipped).

1

2

3


Entune Audio screen/Entune

Audio Plus screen/Entune Premium Audio with Navigation screen.

Meter control switches

2

Energy monitor

 Multi-information display

Press or of the meter control switches and select , and then press or to select the energy monitor display.

 Vehicles with Entune Audio

Press the “CAR” button.

If the “Trip Information” or “Past Record” screen is displayed, select

“Energy”.

 Vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio with

Navigation

Press the “APPS” button, and then select “Eco” on the screen.

If the “Trip Information” or “Past Record” screen is displayed, select

“Energy”.


102


Audio system screen Multi-information display

When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)

When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction motor)

When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine



Audio system screen Multi-information display

When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

103

2

When there is no energy flow

Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

Low Full Low Full

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.


104


Fuel consumption

 Vehicles with Entune Audio

Press the “CAR” button.

If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information” or

“Past Record” on the screen.

 Vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio with

Navigation

Press the “APPS” button, and then select “Eco” on the screen.

If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information” or

“Past Record” on the screen.

■ Trip information

6

7

8

9

3

4

1

If the “Trip Information” screen does not appear, select “Trip Information”.

Reset the trip information data

2 Previous fuel consumption per minute

Current fuel consumption

Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes

5 “Energy Monitor” screen appears

“Past Record” screen appears

Cruising range

Elapsed time

Average vehicle speed

Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the power switch was last turned to ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.




105

7

8

5

6

■ Past record

If the “Past Record” screen does not appear, select “Past Record”.

1

2

Reset the past record data

Best recorded fuel consumption

3 Average fuel consumption (if equipped)

4 Previous fuel consumption record

Current fuel consumption

Update the past record data

“Energy Monitor” screen appears

“Trip Information” screen appears


2

■ Resetting the data

● Selecting “Clear” on the “Trip Information” screen will reset the trip information data.

● Selecting “Clear” on the “Past Record” screen will reset the past record data.

■ Updating the past record data

Selecting “Update” on the “Past Record” screen will update the past record data.

Also, the average fuel consumption displayed in the multi-information display will be reset at the same time.

■ Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.


106



107


3

3-1. Key information

Keys .................................. 108

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors......................... 113

Back door.......................... 119

Smart key system ............. 136

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats ........................ 144

Rear seats......................... 146

Driving position memory ... 149

Head restraints.................. 151

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel .................. 154

Inside rear view mirror ...... 156

Outside rear view

mirrors............................. 158

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows ................. 161

Moon roof.......................... 164


108

Keys

3-1. Key information

The keys

2

3

1

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart key system

(

→

P. 136)

• Operating the wireless remote control function

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

4

1

2

Wireless remote control

Locks all the doors ( →

P. 113)

Unlocks all the doors (

→

P. 113)

3 Opens and closes the power back door * (

→ P. 119)

Sounds the alarm (

→

P. 109)

* : if equipped

Using the mechanical key

To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side.

If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and reattempt to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (

→ P. 590)



109

■

Panic mode

When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

■ If you lose your mechanical keys

New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

■ Conditions affecting the operation

→ P. 138

■ Replacing the battery

→

P. 518

■ Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

■ If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.


Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →

P. 636)

3


110


■ Certification for wireless remote control





111

3


112


NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.

● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.

● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.

● Do not disassemble the keys.

● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.

● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as

TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

■ Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

■ In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

■ When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was provided with your vehicle.


3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

113

Side doors

Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

◆

Smart key system

1

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Grip the front passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors.

*

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

2

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

*

: The door unlock settings can be changed. (

→ P. 117)

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock all the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

◆


1

2

Locks all the doors


Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

3


114


■

Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

■

Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■

When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle

If the door will not lock even when the topside sensor area is touched, try touching both the topside and underside sensor areas at the same time.

■ Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

■

If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

●

Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (

→

P. 590)

● Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (

→ P. 518)



Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside

◆

Door lock switch

1

2

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

115

◆

Inside lock buttons

1

2

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

1

2

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or

ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

3


116


Rear door child-protector lock

1

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

Unlock

2 Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or canceled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 631.

Function

Speed linked door locking function

Operation

All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

Shift position linked door locking function

All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever to position other than P.

Shift position linked door unlocking function

All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P.

Driver’s door linked door unlocking function

All doors are automatically unlocked when driver’s door is opened.



117

■

Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

1 Turn the power switch off.

2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold ,

or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding

.

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.

(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least

5 seconds, and repeat step 2 .)

Unlocking function

Holding the driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s door.

Beep

Holding a passenger’s door handle unlocks all the doors.

Exterior: Beeps 3 times

Interior: Pings once

Holding a door handle unlocks all the doors.

Exterior: Beeps twice

Interior: Pings once

■ Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate.

■

When all the doors are locked with entry function or wireless remote control

●

The doors cannot be unlocked with the door lock switch.

●

The door lock switch can be reset by unlocking all the doors with the entry function or wireless remote control.

■ Conditions affecting operation

→

P. 138

■

Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

→

P. 636)

3


118


WARNING

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.

● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.



119

Back door

The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened/closed by the following procedures.

Locking and unlocking the back door

◆


1

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

Press the button to unlock all the doors.

2

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

Lock the back door again when you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed.

Press the button to lock all the doors.


◆


→

P. 113

◆

Door lock switch

→

P. 115

Opening/closing the back door from inside the vehicle (vehicles with power back door)

Press and hold the switch to open or close, when the power back door is unlocked. (A buzzer sounds.)

Pressing the switch while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation.

3


120


Opening the back door from outside the vehicle

◆

Back door opener

 Vehicles without power back door

Raise the back door while pressing up the back door opener switch.

 Vehicles with power back door

When the back door is unlocked: Press the back door opener switch.

When the back door is locked: While carrying the electronic key on your person, press the back door opener switch.

Pressing the switch while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation.

◆

Wireless remote control (vehicles with power back door)

Press and hold the switch to open/close the power back door.

Pressing the button while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation.



◆

Touchless sensor (vehicles with touchless power back door)

121

The touchless power back door enables automatic opening and closing of the power back door by putting your foot near the lower center part of the rear bumper and moving it away from the rear bumper. When operating the touchless power back door, make sure that the touchless sensor operation is enabled (

→

P. 634) and

that you are carrying an electronic key.

3

1

2

While carrying an electronic key, put your foot within 3.94 in. (100 mm) of the lower center part of the rear bumper and move it away from the rear bumper, the touchless sensor detects the movement.

When all of the doors are locked: When the movement is detected by the touchless sensor, all of the doors will be unlocked.

Check to make sure that the power back door begins to operate.

To stop the power back door partway or operate it again, use the touchless sensor, or the wireless remote control (

→ P. 120), or power back

door switch (

→ P. 122).


122


Power back door switch (vehicles with power back door)

Pressing the switch closes the back door automatically. (A buzzer sounds.)

Pressing the switch while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation. Pressing the switch again will reverse the operation.

When closing the back door

Lower the back door using the back door handle.


Make sure to push the back door down from the outside to close it.


The back door closing assist will activate, and the back door will fully close automatically.



123

Canceling the power back door system (vehicles with power back door)

The power back door system can be disabled by operating the multiinformation display.

1 Press or of the meter control switches and select the multi-information display.

2 Press or of the meter control switches and select and then press .

on

,

3 Select “System Settings” and then press .

4 Press . (“All Off” will be displayed on the multi-information display.)

Each time is pressed, the system will be enabled/disabled.

Canceling the touchless power back door system (vehicles with touchless power back door)

The touchless power back door system can be disabled by operating the multi-information display.


on


3 Select “Touchless Sensor” and then press .

4 “Push to Change Power Back Door foot activation mode” will be displayed on the multi-information display.


,

3


124


Adjusting the open position of the back door (vehicles with power back door)

The open position of the power back door can be adjusted.

■ Using the multi-information display

1 Press or of the meter control switches and select on the multi-information display.


3 Select “Opening Adjustment” and then press .

4 Select the desired position and then press . (

→

P. 634)

■ Using the power back door switch

1 Open the back door, and adjust it to the desired position.

2 Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door until the buzzer sounds 4 times.

,

■

Luggage compartment light

The luggage compartment light turns on when the back door is opened with the luggage compartment light switch on.

1

2

On

Off

■ If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be unlocked from the inside.

1 Remove the cover on the back door trim.

Use a cloth to prevent scratches.



2


After loosening the screw, move the cover.

125

3 Push the lever for the back door motor.

3

2


After loosening the screw, move the cover.

3 Push the lever for the back door motor.


126


■ Back door operation

● A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

● Power back door (if equipped): A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door is opening/closing.

● Power back door (if equipped): The back door can be opened even if it is locked. The back door and side doors will be unlocked when the power back door is opened. Lock all the doors again when you leave the vehicle. All the doors will not lock automatically after the back door has been opened and then closed.

■ Touchless sensor (vehicles with touchless power back door)

The power back door will open/close automatically when the touchless sensor operation is enabled ( →

P. 634) and the following conditions are met:

● The power back door is fully closed/opened.

● The electronic key is within the operational range. (

→ P. 136)

● A foot is put near the lower center part of the rear bumper and moved away from the rear bumper.

The power back door may also be operated by putting a hand, an elbow, a knee, etc. near the lower center part of the rear bumper and moving it away from the rear bumper. Make sure to put it close enough to the center part of the rear bumper.

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)

If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back door will automatically operate in the opposite direction or stop.

■ When reconnecting the 12-volt battery (vehicles with power back door)

To enable the power back door to operate properly, close the back door manually.



127

■ Back door closer (vehicles with power back door)

In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.

■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power back door)

While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from suddenly shutting.

■ Back door closing assist (vehicles with power back door)

If the back door is lowered manually when the back door is stopped at an open position, the back door will fully close automatically.

■ Canceling the adjusted open position of the back door (vehicles with power back door)

Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door until the buzzer sounds 4 times, pauses momentarily, and then sounds 2 times. The open position is initialized to the fully opened position.

■ Situations in which the touchless sensor may operate unintentionally

(vehicles with touchless power back door)

In the following situations, the touchless sensor may operate unintentionally.

To prevent unintentional operation, keep the electronic key out of the operational range or disable the touchless sensor operation. ( →

P. 634)

● When water is applied to the rear bumper, such as in the rain or in a car wash

● When dirt is wiped off the lower center part of the rear bumper

● When a metal object is brought near the lower center part of the rear bumper

● When a vehicle cover is installed or removed

● When pets or other moving things suddenly enter the area below the rear bumper

● When attempting to remove an object from below the lower center part of the rear bumper

● When attempting to remove snow, etc. from below the lower center part of the rear bumper

3


128


■ Situations in which the touchless sensor does not operate properly

(vehicles with touchless power back door)

If the touchless sensor does not operate in the following situations, use the back door opener switch or power back door switch or wireless remote control to open the power back door. (

→ P. 120)

● When the rear bumper is subjected to strong impact

● When an external radio wave source interferes with the communication between the vehicle and electronic key (

→ P. 138)

● When a large amount of water is kept applying to the lower center part of the rear bumper, such as in heavy rain

● When the vehicle is being washed and water is kept applying to lower center part of the rear bumper

●

When the lower center part of the rear bumper is covered with mud, snow, ice, etc.

● When a metal object, etc., such as a towing hitch is installed near the lower center part of the rear bumper

● When the vehicle has been parked for a while near objects that may move and contact the lower center part of the rear bumper, such as grass or trees

● When the vehicle is parked at an area where an electric field is generated, such as a road with an electric snow melting system or parking meters

■ Customization (vehicles with power back door)

Settings (e.g. power back door opening angle) can be changed.


P. 634)



129

WARNING




● Make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the luggage compartment may be thrown out, causing an accident.

● Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.

If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat exhaustion or other injuries.

● Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.

Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.


● Keep the back door closed while driving.

If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects or luggage in the luggage compartment may be thrown out, causing an accident.

● Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

■ Operating the back door


Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door suddenly shut again after it is opened.

● When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

3


130


WARNING

● Vehicles without power back door: The back door may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment.

● When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

● Vehicles without power back door:

When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door handle is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught.

● Do not pull on the back door damper stay (vehicles without power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with power back door) to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door damper stay (vehicles without power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with power back door).

Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay

(vehicles without power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with power back door) to break, causing an accident.

● Vehicles without power back door: If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to a back door, it may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.



131

WARNING

■ Back door closer (vehicles with power back door)

● In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the back door closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the back door, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.

● Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power back door system is canceled.

3


132


WARNING

■ Power back door (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.


● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.

● If the power back door system is turned off while the back door is operating during automatic operation, the back door stops operating. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close suddenly.

● If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the back door may move abruptly.

● On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens automatically. Make sure the back door is fully open and secure.

● In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped back door may suddenly open or close, causing an accident.

• When the back door contacts an obstacle

• When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the power switch is turned to ON mode or the hybrid system is started during automatic operation

● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, the power back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back door may move slightly in the closing direction after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, ask your Toyota dealer for details.



133

WARNING

■ Touchless sensor (vehicles with touchless power back door)

Observe the following precautions when operating the touchless power back door.


● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

● When putting your foot near the lower center part of the rear bumper and moving it from the rear bumper, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipes until they have cooled down sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)



● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

3

NOTICE

■ Back door damper stays (vehicles without power back door)

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.


Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.

● Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod.

● Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves or other fabric items.

● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door.

Damper stays

● Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.


134


NOTICE

■ Back door spindles (vehicles with power back door)

The back door is equipped with spindles that hold the back door in place.


Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door spindle, resulting in malfunction.

● Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the spindle rod.

● Do not touch the spindle rod with gloves or other fabric items.

● Do not attach heavy accessories to the back door. When attaching, ask your

Toyota dealer for details.

Spindles

● Do not place your hand on the spindle or apply lateral forces to it.

■ To prevent back door closer malfunction (vehicles with power back door)

Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is operating.

■ To prevent damage to the power back door (if equipped)

● Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would prevent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunction.

● Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is operating.

● Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected, the power back door will not close automatically.



135

NOTICE

■ Touchless sensor precautions (vehicles with touchless power back door)

The touchless sensor is located behind lower center part of the rear bumper. Observe the following to ensure that the touchless power back door function operates properly:

● Keep the lower center part of the rear bumper clean at all times.

If the lower center part of the rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the touchless sensor may not operate. In this situation, clean off the dirt or snow, move the vehicle from the current position and then check if the touchless sensor operates.

If it does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not apply coatings that have a rain clearing (hydrophilic) effect, or other coatings, to the lower center part of the rear bumper.

● Do not park the vehicle near objects that may move and contact the lower center part of the rear bumper, such as grass or trees.

If the vehicle has been parked for a while near objects that may move and contact the lower center part of the rear bumper, such as grass or trees, the touchless sensor may not operate. In this situation, move the vehicle from the current position and then check if the touchless sensor operates.

If it does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not subject the touchless sensor or its surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the touchless sensor or its surrounding area has been subjected to a strong impact, the touchless sensor may not operate properly. If the touchless sensor does not operate in the following situations, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• The touchless sensor or its surrounding area has been subjected to a strong impact.

• The lower center part of the rear bumper is scratched or damaged.

● Do not disassemble the rear bumper.

● Do not attach stickers to the rear bumper.

● Do not paint the rear bumper.

● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the power back door, disable the touchless sensor. ( →

P. 634)

3


136



The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.

The driver should always carry the electronic key.

●

Locks and unlocks the side doors (

→

P. 113)

● Locks and unlocks the back door ( →

P. 119)

●

Starts the hybrid system (

→

P. 198)

■ Antenna location

1 Antennas outside the cabin

2

3

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna outside the luggage compartment

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3

ft. (0.7 m) of either of the outside front door handles and back door opener switch. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

When starting the hybrid system or changing power switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.



137

■ Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.

(

→ P. 556)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.

Alarm Situation

Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds

An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.

Correction procedure

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Interior alarm sounds continuously

The power switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver’s door was open (or the driver’s door was opened while the power switch was in

ACCESSORY mode).

Turn the power switch off and close the driver’s door.

■ Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

● In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.

● If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

3


138


■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and holding . Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.


The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: →

P. 590)

● When the electronic key battery is depleted

● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

●

When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

●

When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

●

When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

●

If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices



139

■ Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the back door is opened.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or power switch modes are changed.

● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.

● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

●

Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.

● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (

→

P. 138)

3


140


● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.

● A sudden handle operation or a handle operation immediately after entering the effective range may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

● The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

■ To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

■ If the smart key system does not operate properly

● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. ( →

P. 590)

● Starting the hybrid system: →

P. 591



141

■ Electronic key battery depletion

● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system stops. ( →

P. 574)

● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( →

P. 518)

• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.

• The detection area becomes smaller.

• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.

(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

• TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Table lamps

• Induction cookers


Settings (e. g. smart key system) can be changed.


P. 636)

■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

● Locking and unlocking the doors:

Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. ( →

P. 113, 590)

● Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes: →

P. 591

● Stopping the hybrid system: →

P. 199

■ Certification for the smart key system


3


142





143

WARNING

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart key system antennas. ( →

P. 136)

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves.

Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

3


144

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats

Adjustment procedure

 Manual seat

1

2

3

Seat position adjustment lever

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Vertical height adjustment lever (driver’s side only)

 Power seat (driver’s side only)

3

4

5

1

2

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch

Vertical height adjustment switch

Lumbar support adjustment switch



145

WARNING

■ When adjusting the seat position

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

■ Seat adjustment

● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

3


146


Rear seats


Pull up the lever. Then lean back to the desired angle and release the lever.

When a person sits in the rear center position, align all seatbacks at the same angle.



Folding down the rear seatbacks

■ Before folding down the rear seatbacks

1 Stow the rear center seat belt. ( →

P. 32)

2 Stow the rear seat belt buckles.

147

3 Lower the head restraint to the lowest position. (

→

P. 151)

■ Folding down rear seatbacks

Pull the seatback angle adjustment lever and fold down the seatback.

3


148


WARNING

■ When folding the rear seatbacks down

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.

● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment while driving.

● Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.

■ Seat adjustment

● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the rear console box and the rear seat when folding down the rear seatback.

■ After returning the rear seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rearward on the top.

● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

NOTICE

■ Stowing the seat belts

The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before you fold down the rear seatbacks.


Driving position memory

∗


149

This feature automatically adjusts the driver’s seat to suit your preferences.

Driving position memory

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat) can be recorded and recalled by pressing a button.

Two different driving positions can be recorded into memory.

■ Recording procedure

1

2

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

3 Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired positions.

4 While pressing the “SET” button, press button “1” or “2” until the buzzer sounds.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

3

∗

: If equipped


150


■

1

Recall procedure


2


3

Press one of the buttons for the driving position you want to recall until the buzzer sounds.

■ To stop the position recall operation part-way through

Perform any of the following:

● Press the “SET” button.

● Press button “1” or “2”.

● Operate any of the seat adjustment switches.

■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the hybrid system off

Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.

■ If the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The memorized positions are erased.

WARNING

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.



Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

1

Front seats

Up

2

Pull the head restraint up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

1

Rear seats

Up

2

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

151

Lock release button

1

Folding the head restraints (outboard rear seats only)

To use

2

Lift up the head restraint until it locks.

To fold

Push the head restraint lock release button to fold the head restraint.

Lock release button

3


152


■

Removing the head restraints

 Front seats

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

 Rear seats

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

■ Installing the head restraints

 Front seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

 Rear seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

Lock release button


■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.


153

■ Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

WARNING

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

3


154

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel

1


Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down.

2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

Horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

■ After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.



155

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.

3


156


Inside rear view mirror

The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Anti-glare function

 Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

1

2

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.

Normal position

Anti-glare position



157



Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare function mode

On/off

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode each time the power switch is turned to ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)

Indicator

■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

3

WARNING

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.


158


Outside rear view mirrors

1


1

2

To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.

Left

Right

2

1

2

3

4

To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

Up

Right

Down

Left

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear.



Blind Spot Mirrors (if equipped)

The Blind Spot Mirrors increase the view of surrounding area to assist the driver when checking surrounding area before changing lanes.

159

1

2

Blind Spot Mirror field of view

(range of the solid line)

Main mirror field of view (range of the dotted line)

3

■

Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

■ When the mirrors are fogged up

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (

→

P. 429)


160


WARNING


Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■ When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.


3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

Opening and closing procedures

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

1

2

Closing

One-touch closing (driver’s window only) *

3

4

Opening

One-touch opening (driver’s window only) *

* : To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

Window lock switch

Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

161

3

■

The power windows can be operated when


■ Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.


162


■ Jam protection function (driver’s window)

If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■ Catch protection function (driver’s window)

If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening, window movement is stopped.

■ When the power window cannot be opened or closed (driver’s window)

When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually or the window can not be fully opened and closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of the driver’s door.

● Stop the vehicle, with the power switch in ON mode, continually operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing position within 4 seconds after the jam protection function or catch protection function was activated.

Otherwise, by continually operating the power window switch in the onetouch opening position, the window can be opened and closed.

● If the window can not be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, implement the following procedure for function initialization.

1

2


Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position and completely close the window.

3

4

Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.

Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position and after the window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.

5

6

Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more.

Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position, once more, and after the window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window reverses and can not be closed or completely open, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.



163

WARNING



■ Closing the windows

● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. ( →

P. 161)

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

■ Jam protection function (driver’s window)


● The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window.

■ Catch protection function (driver’s window)

● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.

● The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught in the window.

3


164


Moon roof

∗

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

1

Opening and closing

Opens the moon roof *

The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

2

Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.

Closes the moon roof *

*

: Lightly press either end of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

Tilting up and down

1

2

Tilts the moon roof up *

Tilts the moon roof down *

*

: Lightly press either end of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

∗

: If equipped



165

■

The moon roof can be operated when


■ Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens.

■

To reduce moon roof wind noise

When the moon roof is opened automatically, it will stop slightly before the fully open position. Driving with the moon roof in this position can help reduce wind noise.

■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■ Opening the moon roof by small degrees

Quickly press and release the switch.

■

Moon roof open reminder function

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open.

■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or the moon roof does not close normally

The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.

1

2


Press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch until the following movement finishes.

3

The moon roof will tilt up and pause for 1 second or more.

Then it will tilt down, open and close fully.

Release the switch, and then press it in order to ensure proper operation.

If the moon roof does not move automatically, perform the procedure again from the beginning.


Settings (e.g. open reminder function) can be changed.


P. 637)

3


166


WARNING



■ Opening the moon roof

● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Closing the moon roof

● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.

In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. (

→ P. 161)

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

● When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

■ Jam protection function


● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.


167

Driving

4

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle............. 168

Cargo and luggage ........... 178

Vehicle load limits ............. 182

Trailer towing..................... 183

Dinghy towing ................... 197

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch ...... 198

EV drive mode .................. 203

Hybrid transmission........... 205

Turn signal lever................ 211

Parking brake .................... 212

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch ................ 213

Automatic High Beam ....... 217

Fog light switch ................. 222

Windshield wipers

and washer ..................... 223

Rear window wiper

and washer ..................... 227

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank

cap .................................. 230

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense P ..... 233

PCS (Pre-Collision

System)........................... 240


with steering control)....... 255


control ............................. 264

Cruise control.................... 276

Intuitive parking assist....... 280

Rear view monitor

system ............................ 288

BSM

(Blind Spot Monitor) ........ 298

• The Blind Spot Monitor

function ......................... 302

• The Rear Cross Traffic

Alert function................. 305

Driving assist systems ...... 308

4-6. Driving tips


tips .................................. 314

Winter driving tips ............. 317

Utility vehicle precautions ..................... 321


168

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the hybrid system

→

P. 198

1

2

Driving

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (

→

P. 205)

Release the parking brake. ( → P. 212)

3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

1

2

Stopping

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. ( →

P. 205)

3

4

1

2

Parking the vehicle

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake ( → P. 212), and shift the shift lever to P

(

→

P. 205).

Press the power switch to stop the hybrid system.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.


4-1. Before driving

169

1

2

3

Starting off on a steep uphill

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

■

When starting off on a uphill

The hill-start assist control will activate. (

→ P. 308)

■ For fuel-efficient driving

Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary to refrain from activities such as sudden acceleration. ( →

P. 314)

■ Driving in the rain

●

Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

●

Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■

Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.

This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

● When the accelerator pedal is released

● When the brake pedal is depressed while sport mode is selected

■ Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

● For the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

●

For the first 500 miles (800 km):

Do not tow a trailer.

● For the first 600 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speed.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

4


170

4-1. Before driving

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding down operation.

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( →

P. 615)

WARNING



■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the “READY” indicator is illuminated. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

● The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). As there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement. Even though the vehicle is equipped with the vehicle proximity notification system, drive with care as pedestrians in the vicinity may still not notice the vehicle if the surrounding area is noisy.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.


4-1. Before driving

171

WARNING




● During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: → P. 539

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( →

P. 205)

● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

● Do not drive the vehicle off-road.

This is not an AWD vehicle designed for off-road driving. Proceed with all due caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road.

● Do not drive across river crossings or through other bodies of water.

This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage the hybrid system or cause other serious damage to the vehicle.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

4


172

4-1. Before driving

WARNING



■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■ When shifting the shift lever

● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.


● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward.


● Shifting the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Shifting the shift lever to any position other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.


4-1. Before driving

173

WARNING



■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.

If the shift lever is in any position other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while stopped with the “READY” indicator is illuminated, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

4


174

4-1. Before driving

WARNING



■ When the vehicle is parked

● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.

● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.

Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid system and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the “READY” indicator is illuminated.

If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the “READY” indicator is illuminated or immediately after turning the hybrid system off.

Doing so may cause burns.


4-1. Before driving

175

WARNING



■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■ When braking

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

● The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

■ If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.

4


176

4-1. Before driving

NOTICE


● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain driving torque.

● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

● The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire ( → P. 576)


4-1. Before driving

177

NOTICE

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

● Engine stalling

● Short in electrical components

● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:

● Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid transaxle (front and rear), etc.

● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

4


178

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity)

−

(Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

⎯

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400

−

750 (5

×

150) =

650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. ( → P. 182)

For vehicles with SE grade: Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.


1

2

Calculation formula for your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) (

→

P. 606)

4-1. Before driving

179

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B * 2

lb. (kg) − A * 1

lb. (kg) = C * 3

lb. (kg)

* 1

: A = Weight of people

* 2

: B = Total load capacity

* 3

: C = Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) − D * 4

lb. (kg) = E * 5

lb. (kg)

* 4

: D = Additional weight of people

* 5

: E = Available cargo and luggage load

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

4


180

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:

● Receptacles containing gasoline

● Aerosol cans

■ Storage precautions


Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.

● Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• On the luggage cover (if equipped)

• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

● When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.


4-1. Before driving

181

WARNING

■ Capacity and distribution

● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

■ When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions:

● Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.

● If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. ( →

P. 606)

● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of gravity of the vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury.

● If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.

● Do not exceed 101.9 lb. (46.2 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

4

NOTICE

■ When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped)

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof (if equipped).


182

4-1. Before driving

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,

TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.

◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight):

→ P. 606

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) (except SE grade): →

P. 187, 606

TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

◆ Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.

(

→ P. 510)

WARNING

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.


4-1. Before driving

183

Trailer towing

 For vehicles with SE grade

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

 Except vehicles with SE grade

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving habits.

Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

4


184

4-1. Before driving

Towing related terms

■ GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight

(including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed

(including the cargo in the trailer).

■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.


4-1. Before driving

■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

Front GAWR

185

Rear GAWR

■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.

(With brakes)

TWR is calculated assuming base vehicle with one driver, one front passenger, hitch and hitch systems (if required).

Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and

GAWR.

4


186

4-1. Before driving

■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)

The trailer weight rating for towing a trailer without a trailer service brake system.

(Without brakes)

■ Tongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer hitch ball. ( →

P. 188)


4-1. Before driving

187

Weight limits

●

The gross trailer weight must never exceed 1750 lb. (795 kg).

●

The gross combination weight must never exceed 6710 lb.

(3045 kg).

●

The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification Label.

●

The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the

GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.

● If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service brakes are required.

GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR

Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.

■ GCWR *

6710 lb. (3045 kg)

■ TWR *

1750 lb. (795 kg)

■ Unbraked TWR *

1000 lb. (450 kg)

4

* : These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE J2807.


188

4-1. Before driving

Trailer Tongue Weight

●

A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.

●

To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions.

• Tongue Weight

1

2

The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue weight is 9% to 11%.

(Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9% to 11%)

Gross trailer weight

Tongue weight

The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.


4-1. Before driving

189

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

●

If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement of your vehicle.

●

Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.

● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.

●

Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

1

Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball

Weight carrying ball position:

45.2 in. (1147 mm)

2 Hitch receiver pin hole position:

38.9 in. (988 mm)

4

Connecting trailer lights

Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installation may cause damage to the vehicle’s lights. Please take care to comply with your state’s laws when installing trailer lights.


190

4-1. Before driving

Trailer towing tips

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:

●

Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit.

● Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph

(104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.

●

Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicletrailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.

● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination.

●

Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.

Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.


4-1. Before driving

191

●

As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.

● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

●

Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making turn.

●

Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider than normal turning radius.

● Slow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surfaces, etc.

Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.

●

Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance, when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in

D. (

→ P. 205)

●

Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

4


192

4-1. Before driving

●

Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85

°

F [30

°

C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.

(

→

P. 597)

● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following:

1

2

Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and trailer’s wheels.

3 When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.

4

5

Apply the parking brake firmly.

Shift into P and turn off the hybrid system.

●

When restarting after parking on a slope:

1 With the transmission in P, start the hybrid system. Be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed.

2

3

Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.

Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.

4 Have someone retrieve the blocks.


4-1. Before driving

■

Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height

No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

193

1

2

Coupler

Trailer ball

■ Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met:

● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (

→ P. 613)

● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.

● All trailer lights work as required by law.

● All lights work each time you connect them.

● The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

● The trailer is level when it is hitched.

Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.

● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

4


194

4-1. Before driving

■ Break-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components

(such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).

After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.

■ Maintenance

● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.)

● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately

600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

■ If trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.

● If trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize. (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to stabilize the vehicle and trailer.)

● After the trailer swaying has stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.

• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.

• Check the load in the trailer.

Make sure the load has not shifted.

Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.

• Check the load in the vehicle.

Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.

If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.

Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.


4-1. Before driving

195

WARNING

■ Trailer towing precautions

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.

■ To avoid accident or injury

● Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.

● Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as close to the trailer axle as possible.

● Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of which you experience the instability.

● Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.

● Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.

● Do not use cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) when towing.

● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

● Do not tow a trailer when the compact spare tire is installed on your vehicle.

4


196

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

■ Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.

■ When towing a trailer

Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

● If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s braking effectiveness.

● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

NOTICE

■ When installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

■ Do not directly splice trailer lights

Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.


4-1. Before driving

197

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground.

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the hybrid transmission and

AWD system

Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the hybrid transmission and AWD system.

4


198

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch modes.

1

2

3


Check that the parking brake is set.


Firmly depress the brake pedal.

will be displayed on the multi-information display.

4

If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.

Press the power switch shortly and firmly.

When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

If the “READY” indicator turns on, the hybrid system will operate normally.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the “READY” indicator is illuminated.

The hybrid system can be started from any power switch mode.

5 Check that the “READY” indicator is illuminated.

The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.



199

3

4

1

2

Stopping the hybrid system

Stop the vehicle completely.

Set the parking brake (

Press the power switch.

Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the instrument cluster is off.

→ P. 212), and shift the shift lever to P.

Changing power switch modes

2

1

Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off *

The emergency flashers can be used.

The multi-information display will not be displayed.

ACCESSORY mode

3

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

“POWER ON” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

“POWER ON” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

*

: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the hybrid system, the power switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

4


200


When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P

1

2

3

If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to

ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:

Check that the parking brake is set.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” is displayed on the multi-information display and then press the power switch once.

4 Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” on the multi-information display is off.

■ Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the power switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

→

P. 78

■

Electronic key battery depletion

→ P. 141

■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

When starting the hybrid system, the flashing time of the “READY” indicator may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the “READY” indicator is steady on, as steady means the vehicle is able to move.


→

P. 138

■

Notes for the entry function

→ P. 139

■ If the hybrid system does not start

●

The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (

→

P. 84)

Contact your Toyota dealer.

● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P. A message will be displayed on the multi-information display.



201

■ Steering lock

After turning the power switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

■ When the steering lock cannot be released

A message will be displayed on the multiinformation display.

Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the power switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

■ When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” is displayed on the multiinformation display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■

If the “READY” indicator does not come on

In the event that the “READY” indicator does not come on even after performing the proper procedures for starting the vehicle, contact your Toyota dealer.

■

If the hybrid system is malfunctioning

→ P. 556

■ If the electronic key battery is depleted

→

P. 518

■

Operation of the power switch

● If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the power switch mode may not change or the hybrid system may not start.

●

If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.

■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

→

P. 590

4


202


WARNING

■ When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.


If a hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency

If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. ( → P. 539)

However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

● Do not leave the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time without the hybrid system on.

● If “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the power switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the power switch off.

● Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.

■ When starting the hybrid system

If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch

If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.



203

EV drive mode

In EV drive mode, electric power is supplied by the hybrid battery (traction battery), and only the electric motor (traction motor) is used to drive the vehicle.

This mode allows you to drive in residential areas late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and exhaust gas emissions.

However, when the vehicle proximity notification system is active, the vehicle may produce sound.

Turns EV drive mode on/off

When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV drive mode indicator will come on. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]).

4

■

Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on

It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.

● The temperature of the hybrid system is high.

The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.

● The temperature of the hybrid system is low.

The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 68

°

F (20

°

C) for a long period of time etc.

● The gasoline engine is warming up.

● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.

The remaining battery level indicated in the energy monitor display is low.

( →

P. 101)

● Vehicle speed is high.

● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

● The windshield defogger is in use.


204


■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold

If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm up.

In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode.

After the hybrid system has started and the “READY” indicator has illuminated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV drive mode.

■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.

● The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.

The remaining battery level indicated in the energy monitor display is low.

( →

P. 101)

● Vehicle speed is high.

● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

When it is possible to inform the driver of automatic cancelation in advance, a prior notice screen will appear on the multi-information display.

■ Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode

EV drive mode’s possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to approximately 0.6 mile (1 km). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used. (The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)

■ Fuel economy

The hybrid system is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.

WARNING


When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the vehicle. Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them, so take extra care while driving.

Therefore, take extra care while driving even if the vehicle proximity notification system is active.


Hybrid transmission

Shifting the shift lever


205

While the power switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift position purpose

Shift position

P

R

Purpose/function

Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system

Reversing

N

D

S

Neutral

(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)

Normal driving

* 1

S mode driving * 2

( →

P. 207)

* 1

: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D position for normal driving.

* 2

: By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control accelerating forces and engine braking forces.

4


206


Selecting the driving mode

The following modes can be selected to suit driving conditions.

■ Eco drive mode

Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating.

Press the “ECO MODE” button to select Eco drive mode.

The “ECO MODE” indicator light will come on.

Press the button again to cancel

Eco drive mode.

■ Sport mode

Use sport mode for sporty driving or driving in mountainous regions.

Press the “SPORT” button to select sport mode.

The “SPORT” indicator light will come on.

Press the button again to cancel sport mode.



207

Selecting shift ranges in the S position

1

2

To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can be selected by operating the shift lever allowing you to drive in the shift range of your choosing.

Upshifting

Downshifting

The selected shift range, from S1 to S6, will be displayed on the multi-information display.

The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to between S2 and S5 according to vehicle speed.

■ Shift ranges and their functions

● You can choose from 6 levels of accelerating force and engine braking force.

●

A lower shift range will provide greater accelerating force and engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.

●

If you accelerate while in ranges 1 to 5, the shift range may automatically shift up in accordance with the engine speed.

4


208


■

Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency ( →

P. 431). To improve air

conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.

■

Deactivation of the driving mode

● Eco drive mode will not be canceled until the “ECO MODE” button is pressed, even if the hybrid system is turned off after driving in Eco drive mode.

● Sport mode will be canceled if the hybrid system is turned off after driving in sport mode.

■

When driving with cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control activated (if equipped)

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate because cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control will not be canceled.

●

While driving in D position or S mode, downshifting to 5 or 4. (

→

P. 207)

●

When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D position.

( →

P. 206)

■ Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting.

The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the power switch is in ON mode and the brake pedal is being depressed.



209

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Releasing the shift lock:

1

2

3

Set the parking brake.

Turn the power switch off.

4

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

4

5 Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.


210


WARNING

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock

Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and depress the brake pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge precaution

If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever in N for a long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start.


Turn signal lever

1

2

Operating instructions

Right turn

Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)

3

4

The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

Left turn


211

4

■ Turn signals can be operated when


■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change

Operate the lever in the opposite direction.


The setting of the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.


P. 637)


212


Parking brake

1

2

Sets the parking brake

Fully pull the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.

Releases the parking brake

Slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button.

U.S.A. Canada

■ Parking the vehicle

→ P. 168

■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

→ P. 547

■ Usage in winter time

→ P. 318

NOTICE


Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.


4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

213

Operating instructions

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

 Type A

1

2

3

4

(U.S.A.)

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.

The headlights, daytime running lights (

→

P. 215)

and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically.

(When the power switch is in ON mode)

Off

(Canada)

The daytime running lights turn on. (

→

P. 215)

4


214


1

2

3

4

 Type B




→

P. 215)

Off

1

 Type C


2

3



→

P. 215)



215

1

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

2

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

■ Daytime running light system

 Vehicles with halogen headlights

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released with the headlight switch off or in

/ position. (Illuminate dimmer than the headlight lights.) Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

 Vehicles with LED headlights

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released with the headlight switch off or in

/ position. (Illuminate brighter than the parking lights.) Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

●

Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

4


216


■ Headlight control sensor (if equipped)

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

■ Automatic light off system

When the headlights are on: The lights turn off 30 seconds after the power switch is turned off and a door is opened and all of the doors are closed. (The lights turn off immediately if are locked.)

on the key is pressed while all the doors

When only the tail lights are on: The lights turn off after the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch off once, or turn the light switch to once, then turn it to or to

.

If any of the doors is kept open and the power switch off, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

■ Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.


Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.


P. 638)

NOTICE


Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.



Automatic High Beam

∗

217

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of vehicles ahead etc., and automatically turns the high beam on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beam on or off manually if necessary.

■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High Beam system

Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch in the position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the headlights are turned on automatically to indicate that the system is active.

4

∗ : If equipped


218


Turning the high beam on/off manually

■ Switching to low beam

Pull the lever to the original position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.

Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High

Beam system again.

■ Switching to high beam

Turn the light switch to position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.

■ High beam automatic turning on or off conditions

● When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second):

• Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.

● If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned off:

• Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

• Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.



219

■ Camera sensor detection information

● The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle

• When vehicles ahead are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees

• When vehicles ahead appear from the faraway lane on wide road

• When vehicles ahead have no lights

● The high beam may be turned off if vehicles ahead that is using fog lights without using the headlights is detected.

● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause the high beam to switch to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.

● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn the high beam on or off:

• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead

• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead

• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side

• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of luggage

● The high beam may be turned on or off when the driver does not expect it.

● Bicycles or similar objects may not be detected.

4


220


● In the situations shown below, the system may not be able to accurately detect surrounding brightness levels. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to cause problems for pedestrians, vehicles ahead or other parties. In these cases, manually switch between the high and low beams.

• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)

• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.

• The windshield is cracked or damaged.

• The camera sensor is deformed or dirty.

• The camera sensor temperature is extremely high.

• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights.

• Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color, or are not aimed properly.

• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.

• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks etc.).

• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.

• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.

• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck.

• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty.

• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.

• The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in an abnormal manner.

• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.



221

■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.

1 Turn the power switch off while the following conditions are met.

2

3

• The headlight switch is in .

• The headlight switch lever is in high beam position.


Within 5 seconds after 2 , repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 9 times, then leave the lever in high beam position.

Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.

■ If a warning message of the Automatic High Beam is displayed

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.


The Automatic High Beam can be turned off.


P. 638)

4


222


Fog light switch

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

1

2

(U.S.A.) or (Canada)

Turns the fog lights off

Turns the fog lights on

■ Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.



Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the wiper lever

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.

 Intermittent windshield wipers

1

2

3

4

For the U.S.A.:

Intermittent operation

Low speed operation

High speed operation

Temporary operation

3

4

1

2

For Canada:


Low speed operation


Temporary operation

223

4

5

If equipped, wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

6 Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency


224


7 Washer/wiper dual operation

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

3

4

1

2

 Rain-sensing windshield wipers

Rain-sensing operation

Low speed operation


Temporary operation

When “AUTO” is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

5

6

The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when “AUTO” is selected.

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity




The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

225

■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when


■

Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops.

● If the wiper switch is turned to the “AUTO” position while the power switch is in ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show that “AUTO” mode is activated.

● If the wiper sensitivity is adjusted to higher, the wiper may operate once to indicate the change of sensitivity.

●

If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194

°

F (90

°

C) or higher, 5

°

F (-15

°

C) or lower, the automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.

■

If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

4


226


WARNING

■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.


Do not leave the wipers on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.



Rear window wiper and washer

227

1

2

Turning the end of the lever turns on the rear window wiper, and pushing the lever away from you turns on the rear window wiper and washer.

 For the U.S.A.


Normal operation

4



228


1

2

 For Canada


Normal operation




229

■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when


■ If no washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzle is not blocked if there is washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

■ When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.

■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

4


230

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

●

Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch off.

●

Confirm the type of fuel.

■ Fuel types

→ P. 615

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.


4-4. Refueling

231

WARNING

■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.

● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.

● Do not top off the fuel tank.

4

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.


232

4-4. Refueling

1

Opening the fuel tank cap

Pull up the opener to open the fuel filler door.

2

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to remove it and hang it on the back of the fuel filler door.

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

WARNING

■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.


4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense P

∗

233

The Toyota Safety Sense P consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System)

→

P. 240

◆ LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

→

P. 255

◆ Automatic High Beam

→ P. 217

◆ Dynamic radar cruise control

→

P. 264

WARNING

■ Toyota Safety Sense P

The Toyota Safety Sense P is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely.

4

∗

: If equipped


234


Vehicle data recording

The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will record certain data, such as:

• Accelerator status

• Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions

• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)

• Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating)

The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle.

●

Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased



• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

● Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.

The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available.



235

Sensors

Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.

1 Radar sensor 2 Camera sensor

4


236


WARNING

■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor


Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.

1

Radar sensor

2

Front grille emblem

If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the front grille emblem is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and front grille emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.

● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.

● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.



237

WARNING

■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor


Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield.

• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.

• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not install an antenna or attach stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor (shaded area in the illustration).

4

● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or ice. ( →

P. 428)

● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.

If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.

● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.

If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not get the camera sensor wet.

● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.

● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.


238


WARNING

● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.

● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.

● Do not install an electronic device or device that emits strong electric waves near the camera sensor.

● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor

(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.

● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

■ Certification




239

4

240


PCS (Pre-Collision System)

∗

The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians * 1

in front of your vehicle.

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. (

→ P. 245)

* 1

: Depending on the region in which the vehicle was sold, the pedestrian detection function may not be available. See the following table for details.

Countries/areas

U.S. mainland, Canada,

Hawaii

Guam, Saipan, Puerto Rico

Function availability

The pedestrian detection function is available

The pedestrian detection function is not available

Regions

Region A

Region B

∗

: If equipped



◆

Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multiinformation display to urge the driver to take evasive action.

241

◆

Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

◆

Pre-collision braking

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.

4


242


WARNING

■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.

Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision:

→ P. 251

• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →

P. 251

● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.



243

WARNING

■ Pre-Collision braking

● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied.

● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.

● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.

● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.

● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.

4


244


WARNING

■ When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

● When the vehicle is being towed

● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle

● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation

● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the hybrid system on and the tires are allowed to rotate freely

● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer

● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other reasons

● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning

● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road

● When the tires are not properly inflated

● When the tires are very worn

● When tires of a size other than specified are installed

● When tire chains are installed

● When a compact spare tire is used

● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle



245

Changing settings of the pre-collision system

■ Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system



3 Select and then press .


The system is automatically enabled each time the power switch is turned to ON mode.

If the system is disabled, the

PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

,

4


246


■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing



3 Select “Sensitivity” and then press .

Each time is pressed, the operation timing of the warning will be changed.

1

The operation timing setting is retained when the power switch is turned off.

Far

2

The warning will begin to operate earlier than with the default timing.

Middle

3

This is the default setting.

Near

The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing.

,



247

■

Operational conditions

Availability of the pedestrian detection function and pre-collision braking function depend on the region in which the vehicle was sold. (For specific countries/areas: →

P. 240)

Read the following for details:

 Region A

(The pedestrian detection function is available)

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.

Each function is operational at the following speeds:

●

Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h).

(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and

50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

●

Pre-collision brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 19 and 110 mph (30 and

180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 19 and 50 mph [30 and 80 km/h].)


●

Pre-collision braking:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h).

(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and

50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)


The system may not operate in the following situations:

● If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

●

If the shift lever is in R

●

If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

● If the PCS warning light is flashing or illuminated

4


248


 Region B

(The pedestrian detection function is not available)

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle is high.

Each function is operational at the following speeds:

● Pre-collision warning:


180 km/h).

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

● Pre-collision brake assist:


180 km/h).


● Pre-collision braking:


180 km/h).


The system may not operate in the following situations:

● If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

● If the shift lever is in R

●

If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

● If the PCS warning light is flashing or illuminated

■ Pedestrian detection function

* 2

The pre-collision system detects pedestrians based on the size, profile, and motion of a detected object. However, a pedestrian may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object, preventing the system from operating properly. (

→ P. 249)

* 2

: For countries/areas specified as Region B ( →

P. 240), the pedestrian detec-

tion function may not be available.



249

■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:

● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.

● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.

• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian * 2

• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is making a left/right turn

4

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

• When driving on a road where relative location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent lane may change, such as on a winding road


250


• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is uneven or undulating

• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, or walls

• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian

* 2

, or object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve

• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge

• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion on the road surface or roadside

• When a crossing pedestrian approaches very close to the vehicle * 2

• When passing through a place with a low structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic sign, etc.)

• When passing under an object (billboard, etc.) at the top of an uphill road



251

• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes

• When using an automatic car wash

• When driving through or under objects that may contact the vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mistaken for a vehicle or pedestrian

* 2

• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail

• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present

* 2

: For countries/areas specified as Region B (

→

P. 240), the pedestrian

detection function may not be available.

■

Situations in which the system may not operate properly

● In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:

• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle

• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer

4

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper


252


• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car

• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)

• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle

• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front of your vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor

• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel

• After the hybrid system has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/ right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered

• If the wheels are misaligned



253

• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor

• The vehicle is wobbling.

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.

• When driving on a hill

• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned

● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface

● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly

* 2

:

• Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)

• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure

• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part of their body

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting

• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle

• Groups of pedestrians which are close together

• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright

• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel

• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as their surroundings

• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects

• Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road

• Pedestrians who are walking fast

• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly

• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object

• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view mirror, etc.)

* 2

: For countries/areas specified as Region B ( →

P. 240), the pedestrian

detection function may not be available.

4


254


■ If the PCS warning light flashes and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display

The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot, such as in the sun

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment

• When the radar sensor or front grille emblem is dirty or covered with snow, etc.

• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield:

→ P. 428)

• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor

● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or the warning message does not disappear, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ If VSC is disabled

●

If VSC is disabled (

→

P. 310), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision

braking functions are also disabled.

● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake

System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.



LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

∗

255

Summary of functions

When driving on highways and freeways with white (yellow) lines, this function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane and provides assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane.

The LDA system recognizes visible white (yellow) lines with the camera sensor on the upper portion of the front windshield.

4

Functions included in LDA system

◆

Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds, check the surrounding road situation and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.

∗

: If equipped


256


◆

Steering control function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.

If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds.

◆

Vehicle sway warning

When the vehicle is swaying or appears as if it may depart from its lane multiple times, the warning buzzer sounds and a message is displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.



257

WARNING

■ Before using LDA system

Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.

Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ To avoid operating LDA system by mistake

When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.

■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system

Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.

The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● A spare tire, tire chains, etc., are equipped.

● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.

● Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.

● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).

● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.

● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc., are present due to road repair.

● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.

● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc.

● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways.

● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.

● Vehicle is towing a trailer or another vehicle.

4


258


WARNING

■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake

● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc., on the surface of the lights.

● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).

● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.

Turning LDA system on

Press the LDA switch to turn the

LDA system on.

The LDA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the LDA switch again to turn the LDA system off.

When the LDA system is turned on or off, operation of the LDA system continues in the same condition the next time the hybrid system is started.



259

1

Indications on multi-information display

LDA indicator

The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status.

2

3

Illuminated in white:

LDA system is operating.

Illuminated in green:

Steering wheel assistance of the steering control function is operating.

Flashing in orange:

Lane departure alert function is operating.

Operation display of steering wheel operation support

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering control function is operating.

Lane departure alert function display

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information screen.

 Inside of displayed white lines is white

 Inside of displayed white lines is black

4

Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange.

Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled.


260


■

Operation conditions of each function

● Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• LDA is turned on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• Turn signal lever is not operated.

• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).

• No system malfunctions are detected. (

→

P. 557)

●

Steering control function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.

• Setting for “Steering Assist” in on the multi-information display is set to “On”. ( →

P. 633)

• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more.

• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

● Vehicle sway warning

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• Setting for “Sway Warning” in on the multi-information display is set to “On”. ( →

P. 633)

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• No system malfunctions are detected. (

→

P. 557)



261

■ Temporary cancellation of functions

When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. ( →

P. 260)

■ Steering control function

Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.

■ Lane departure alert function

The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.

■ Hands off steering wheel alert

When the system determines that the driver has removed the hands from the steering wheel while the steering control function is operating, a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the buzzer sounds.

■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road

The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be recognized.

4


262


■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly

In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and various functions may not operate normally.

● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white

(yellow) lines.

● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.

● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones are present.

● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white).

● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.

● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.

● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc., enters the camera.

● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a slope.

●

The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.

●

The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.

● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.

●

The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.

●

The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure.

● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.

● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).

●

The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis has deviated.

● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.

● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.

● Snow tires, etc., are equipped.



263

■ Warning messages

Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. ( →

P. 557)


The following settings can be changed.

Function

Lane departure alert function

Steering control function

Vehicle sway warning function

Setting details

Adjust alert sensitivity

Turn steering wheel assistance on and off

Turn function on and off

Adjust alert sensitivity

For how to change settings, refer to P. 631.

4


264


Dynamic radar cruise control

∗


In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates and decelerates to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.

1

2

3

4

5

Use the dynamic radar cruise control on freeways and highways.

●

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (

→

P. 267)

●

Constant speed control mode (

→

P. 272)

Indicators

Set speed

Display

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button

Cruise control switch


∗

: If equipped


265

WARNING

■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.

The dynamic radar cruise control provides driving assistance to reduce the driver’s burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.

Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided by the system.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control has limited capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation

Switch the dynamic radar cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

4


266


WARNING

■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● At entrances to freeways and highways

● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or camera sensor

● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration

● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often



267

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 328ft. (100m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes.

1

2

3

Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-tovehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance button.

Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.

4


268


1

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control.

2

Radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

If the “ON-OFF” button is pressed and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system turns on in constant speed control mode. (

→

P. 272)

Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed

(above approximately 30 mph

[50 km/h]) and push the lever down to set the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.



269

Adjusting the set speed

1

2

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever up or down to change the speed, and release when the desired speed is reached.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) * 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) * 2

each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment:

For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii and NATO Germany: Increases or decreases 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

* 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

* 2

increments for as long as the lever is held

For Canada, Guam, Saipan and Puerto Rico: Increases or decreases 5 mph (8 km/h)

* 1

or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)

* 2

increments for as long as the lever is held

In the constant speed control mode (

→ P. 272), the set speed will be

increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) * 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) * 2

each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is held.

* 1

: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

* 2

: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

4


270


1

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Pressing the button changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

Long

Preceding vehicle mark

2

3

Medium

Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the power switch is turned to

ON mode.

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

Distance options

Long

Medium

Short

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)





271

1

Canceling and resuming the speed control

Pulling the lever toward you cancels the speed control.

2

The speed control is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.

Pushing the lever up resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.

However, cruise control does not resume when the vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle.

Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-tovehicle distance.

■ Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.

●

When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed

●

When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed

●

Immediately after the cruise control speed was set

● When depressing the accelerator pedal

4


272


Selecting constant speed control mode

1

When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar sensor, etc.

2

With the cruise control off, press and hold the “ON-OFF” button for 1.5 seconds or more.

Immediately after the “ON-OFF” button is pressed, the radar cruise control indicator will come on.

Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator.

Switching to constant speed control mode is only possible when operating the lever with the cruise control off.

Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed



Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.


Adjusting the speed setting:

→ P. 269

Canceling and resuming the speed setting:

→ P. 271



273

■

Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when

● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.

■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of time.

● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.

● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.

● Pre-collision braking is activated.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■

Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

●

Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.

● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).




● Pre-collision braking is activated.

If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■

Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

4


274


■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (

→ P. 271) may not be activated.

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly

● Vehicles traveling at low speeds

● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane

● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards

(caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

●

Preceding vehicle has an extremely high ground clearance



275

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly

In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not operate properly.

● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

4

● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly


276


Cruise control

∗


1

2

3

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Indicators

Set speed

Cruise control switch

1

Setting the vehicle speed

Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed



Cruise control “SET” indicator and set speed will be displayed on the multi-information display.


∗

: If equipped



277

Adjusting the set speed

1

2

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

* 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

* 2

each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

* 1

: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

* 2

: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

1

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.

2

The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

4


278


■

Cruise control can be set when

● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

●

The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).




■ If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multiinformation display

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.



279

WARNING

■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

4


280


Intuitive parking assist

∗

The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display, the audio system screen * and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.

*

: Entune Audio, Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio with Navigation only

3

4

1

2

Types of sensors

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

Turning the intuitive parking assist on/off


on


The tional.

will be displayed to inform the driver that the system is opera-

,

∗

: If equipped



281

Display

When the sensors detect an obstacle, the following displays inform the driver of the position and distance to the obstacle.

■ Multi-information display

1 Front corner sensor detection

2

3

4

Front center sensor detection

Rear corner sensor detection

Rear center sensor detection

■ Audio system screen (vehicles with navigation system, Entune

Audio Plus or Entune Audio)

1 Intuitive parking assist display

When the rear view monitor

*

,

Toyota parking assist monitor * or panoramic view monitor

*

is not displayed.

A graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is detected. The screen can be set so that the graphic is not displayed. (

→

P. 284)

: Select to mute the buzzer sounds.

2 Insert display

When the rear view monitor

*

or

Toyota parking assist monitor

* is displayed:

A simplified image is displayed on the right upper corner of the audio system screen when an obstacle is detected.

When the panoramic view monitor

*

is displayed:

The position and distance is displayed on the panoramic view monitor screen when an obstacle is detected.

*

: If equipped

4


282


Sensor detection display, obstacle distance

■ Distance display

Sensors that detect an obstacle will illuminate continuously or blink.

Display * 1

Insert display

Approximate distance to obstacle

Front corner sensor/ front center sensor

Rear corner sensor/ rear center sensor

Front center sensor:

3.3 ft. (100 cm) to

1.6 ft. (50 cm)

Rear center sensor:

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to

2.0 ft. (60 cm)

(continuous) (blinking slowly)

(continuous) (blinking)

1.6 ft. (50 cm) to

1.3 ft. (40 cm)

1.3 ft. (40 cm) to

1.0 ft. (30 cm)

Rear corner sensor:

1.8 ft. (55 cm) to

1.3 ft. (40 cm)

Rear center sensor:

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to

1.5 ft. (45 cm)

Rear corner sensor:

1.3 ft. (40 cm) to

1.0 ft. (30 cm)

Rear center sensor:

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to

1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(continuous) (blinking rapidly)

Less than

1.0 ft. (30 cm)

Rear corner sensor:

Less than 1.0 ft.

(30 cm)

Rear center sensor:

Less than 1.1 ft.

(35 cm)

(blinking * 2 or continuous * 3 )

(continuous)

* 1

: The images may differ from that shown in the illustrations. ( →

P. 281)

* 2

: Multi-information display

* 3

: Audio system screen



283

■ Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.

● The buzzer sounds faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.

When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously.

• Front and rear corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

• Front center sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

● When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.

1

2

3

4

Detection range of the sensors

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)




The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.

4


284


Setting up intuitive parking assist (vehicles with navigation system, Entune Audio Plus or Entune Audio)

You can change the buzzer sound volume and the screen operating conditions.

1

2

3

4

 Vehicles with an Entune Audio

Press the “SETUP” button.

Select “Vehicle” on the screen.

Select “TOYOTA Park Assist Settings” on the screen.

Select the desired item.

 Vehicles with an Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio with

Navigation

3

4

1

2

Press the “APPS” button.

Select “Setup” on the screen.

Select “Vehicle” on the screen.

Select “TOYOTA Park Assist Settings” on the screen.

5 Select the desired item.

● The buzzer sound volume can be adjusted.

●

On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display.

● Front and rear center sensor display and tone indication can be set.

■

The intuitive parking assist can be operated when

● Front corner sensors:

• The power switch is in ON mode.

• The shift lever is not in P.

• The vehicle speed is approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.

● Front center sensors:


• The shift lever is not in P or R.

• The vehicle speed is approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.

● Rear corner and rear center sensors:


• The shift lever is in R.



285

■ Intuitive parking assist display

When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the upper corner of the screen even if the display setting has been set to off.

■ Sensor detection information

● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s bumper.

● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.

• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.)

• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected.

• The sensor is covered in any way.

• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.

• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass

• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.

• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.

• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.

• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.

• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.

• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.

• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather

• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.

• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.

• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.

• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.

In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they are.

4


286


● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles:

• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves

• Sharply-angled objects

• Low obstacles

• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

● The following situations may occur during use.

• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.

• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.

• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the beep sounds.

• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once.

• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise of the air conditioning system.


Setting of buzzer volume can be changed.


P. 638)

■ If a message is displayed on the multi-information display

→ P. 558

■ Certification (Canada only)

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

WARNING

■ When using the Intuitive parking assist


Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.

● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.



287

NOTICE

■ When using intuitive parking assist

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sounds when no obstacles are detected.

● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.

● If the bumper collides with something.

● If the display shows continuously without a beep.

● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.

If the error occurs even when there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.

■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

4


288


Rear view monitor system

∗

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle and fixation guide lines while backing up, for example while parking.

The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.

The rear view monitor system will activate when the shift lever is in

R.

If you move the lever out of R, the rear view monitor system will be deactivated.

When the shift lever is shifted to the R position and any mode button (such as “MENU”/“APPS”) is pressed, the rear view monitor system is canceled, and the screen is switched to the mode of the button that was pressed.

∗

: If equipped



289

Using the rear view monitor system

■ Screen description

The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to R while the power switch is in ON mode.

1

2

3

4

Vehicle width guide lines

The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.

Vehicle center guide line

The lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Distance guide line

The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 1.5 ft.

(0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide line

The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft.

(1 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.

4


290


Rear view monitor system precautions

■ Area displayed on screen

The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.

The image on the rear view monitor system can be

adjusted: refer to P. 342.

• The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.

• Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.

• The camera uses a special lens.

The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.

Corners of bumper

• Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a backlit license plate, it may interfere with the display.



■ Rear view monitor system camera

The camera for the rear view monitor system is located above the license plate.

291

● Using the camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

■ Differences between the screen and the actual road

The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the fixation guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

4


292


●

When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.

● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be further from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are.

In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.



293

●

When any part of the vehicle sags

When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the fixation guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

A margin of error

■ When approaching three-dimensional objects

The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

● Vehicle width guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown in the illustration, the truck appears to be outside of the vehicle width guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the vehicle width guide lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the vehicle width guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

4


294


●

Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point 2 . However, in reality if you back up to point

1 , you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that 1 is closest and 3 is farthest away. However, in reality, the distance to 1 and 3 is the same, and 2 is farther than

1 and 3 .



295

Things you should know

■ If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Likely cause



The image is difficult to see

Solution

• The vehicle is in a dark area

• The temperature around the lens is either high or low

• The outside temperature is low

• There are water droplets on the camera

• It is raining or humid

• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to the camera

• There are scratches on the camera

• Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the camera

• The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights, etc.



The image is blurry

If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.)

The image on the rear view monitor system can be adjusted: refer to

P. 342.

Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera.



The image is out of alignment

Flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

 The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignment

The camera position is out of alignment.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

• The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due to a tire puncture, etc.)

• The vehicle is used on an incline.

If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.

4


296


WARNING

■ When using the rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding.

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.

● Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up.

The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state.

Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.

● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.

● The instructions given are only guide lines.

When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system.

● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it.

● Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow

• When using tire chains or the compact spare tire (if equipped)

• When the back door is not closed completely

• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.

● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with the mirrors all around the vehicle before proceeding.

● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixation guide lines displayed on the screen may change.

● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (

→ P. 291)



297

NOTICE

■ How to use the camera

● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases.

• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change.

• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

• When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.

● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

4


298


BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

∗

Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;

●

The Blind Spot Monitor function

Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes

● The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function

Assists the driver when backing up

These functions use same sensors.

1 The Blind Spot Monitor on/off screen and indicator

The Blind Spot Monitor system can be turned on/off on the multi-information display. When the system is set to on, the indicator illuminates on the multi-information display. The Blind Spot Monitor function and the Rear

Cross Traffic Alert function are turned on/off simultaneously.

∗

: If equipped



299

2

3

Outside rear view mirror indicators

Blind Spot Monitor function:

When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function:

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the outside rear view mirror indicators flash.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function only)

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the left-hand rear seat.

Turning the Blind Spot Monitor system on/off

1 Press or of the meter control switch and select multi-information display.

2 Press or of the meter control switch and select then press .

on the

, and

4

■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

■ Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio volume.

■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor system

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, the

BSM warning messages will be displayed: (

→ P. 563, 565)

● There is a malfunction with the sensors

● The sensors have become dirty

● The outside temperature is extremely high or low

● The sensor voltage has become abnormal


300


■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system





301

WARNING

■ Handling the radar sensor

One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the

Blind Spot Monitor system can function correctly.

● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

● Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Toyota color.

4


302


The Blind Spot Monitor function

The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.

The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

1

The range of the detection area extends to:

Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from the side of the vehicle

2

3

The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle is not in the detection area

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper



303

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the

Blind Spot Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

■ The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when

● The Blind Spot Monitor system is turned on

● Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■ The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when

● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.

● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a vehicle

The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.

*

● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects

*

● Following vehicles that are in the same lane

*

● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle

*

*

: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

4


304


■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not function correctly

● The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.

• When ice, mud, etc. is attached to the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water, etc.

• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as your vehicle accelerates

• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.

• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle

• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from your vehicle

• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle

• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

• Directly after the Blind Spot Monitor system is turned on

• When towing a trailer

• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle.

● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the following conditions:

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle

• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area

• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle



305

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse.

It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle’s existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.

1

Approaching vehicles

2

Detection areas

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replacement for careful driving. The driver must be careful when backing up, even when using the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver’s own visual confirmation of behind you and your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are no pedestrians, other vehicles, etc. before backing up. Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

4


306


The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster vehicles from farther away.

Example:

Approaching vehicle

Fast

Slow

Speed

18 mph (28 km/h)

5 mph (8 km/h)

1 Approximate alert distance

65 ft. (20 m)

18 ft. (5.5 m)

■

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when

● The Blind Spot Monitor system is turned on.

● The shift lever is in R.

● Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

● Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and

18 mph (28 km/h).



307

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehicle

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects.

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.

*

● Vehicles approaching from directly behind

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects *

● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle *

● Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle *

*

: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function correctly

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

● When ice, mud, etc. is attached to the rear bumper

● During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.

● When multiple vehicles approach continuously

● Shallow angle parking

● When a vehicle is approaching at high speed

●

When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.

● Directly after the Blind Spot Monitor system is turned on

●

Directly after the hybrid system is started with the Blind Spot Monitor system is set to on

● When towing a trailer

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect because of obstacles

4


308


Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆

ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System)

The electronically controlled system generates braking force corresponding to the brake operation

◆

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

◆

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

◆

TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

◆

Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on an incline

◆

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel



◆

E-Four (Electronic On-Demand AWD system)

309

Automatically switches from front wheel drive to four-wheel drive (AWD) according to the driving conditions, helping to ensure reliable handling and stability. Examples of conditions where the system will switch to AWD are when cornering, going uphill, starting off or accelerating, and when the road surface is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.

◆

Trailer Sway Control

Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake pressure for individual wheels and reducing engine torque when trailer sway is detected.

Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if VSC turned off or experiences a malfunction.

When the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway Control systems are operating

The slip indicator will flash while the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway

Control systems are operating.

4


310


Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. Pressing to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release .

“Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown on the multi-information display.

Press again to turn the system back on.

■ Turning off the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems

To turn the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems off, press and hold

for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

“Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown and the VSC OFF indicator light will come on.

*

Press again to turn the systems back on.

*: On vehicles with pre-collision system, pre-collision brake assist and precollision brake braking will also be disabled. The PCS warning light will come on and the message will be shown on the multi-information display.

( →

P. 240)

■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed

TRAC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.



311

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, Trailer

Sway Control, TRAC and the hill-start assist control systems

Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

● Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

● A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

● The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

● The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ ECB operating sound

ECB operating sound may be heard in the following cases, but it does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred.

● Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is operated.

● Motor sound of the brake system heard from the front part of the vehicle when the driver’s door is opened.

● Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when 1 or 2 minutes passed after the stop of the hybrid system.

■ EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems

After turning the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:

● When the power switch is turned off.

● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases

If the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control

When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:

● The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/ backward on an upward incline).

●

The vehicle is stopped.

●

The accelerator pedal is not depressed.

● The parking brake is not engaged.

4


312


■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:

● The shift lever is moved to P or N.

● The accelerator pedal is depressed.

● The parking brake is engaged.

● Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.

WARNING

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains

● When driving over bumps in the road

● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.

Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■ Hill- start assist control does not operate effectively when

● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.

● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.

■ When the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway Control is activated

The slip indicator flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems off unless necessary.



313

WARNING

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

■ Trailer Sway Control precaution

The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situations. Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle, trailer, road surface, and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control system may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s manual for information on how to tow your trailer properly.

■ If trailer sway occurs


Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

● Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize. ( →

P. 194)

4


314

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips

For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points:

◆

Using Eco drive mode

When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. (

→

P. 206)

◆

Use of Hybrid System Indicator

The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the Hybrid System

Indicator within Eco area. (

→

P. 95)

◆

Shift lever operation

Shift the shift lever to D when stopped at a traffic light, or driving in heavy traffic etc. Shift the shift lever to P when parking. When using the N, there is no positive effect on fuel consumption. In the N, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. Also, when using the air conditioning system, etc., the hybrid battery

(traction battery) power is consumed.

◆

Accelerator pedal/brake pedal operation

●

Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.

●

Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor fuel consumption. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.


4-6. Driving tips

315

◆

When braking

Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in a timely manner. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.

◆

Delays

Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel economy. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When driving in a traffic jam, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

◆

Highway driving

Control and maintain the vehicle at a constant speed. Before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.

◆

Air conditioning

Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help reduce excessive gasoline consumption.

In summer: When the ambient temperature is high, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning system and reduce fuel consumption as well.

In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until it and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel.

Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.

◆

Checking tire inflation pressure

Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel economy.

Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel economy. Use tires that are appropriate for the season.

4


316

4-6. Driving tips

◆

Luggage

Carrying heavy luggage will lead to poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack will also cause poor fuel economy.

◆

Warming up before driving

Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to excess fuel consumption.


4-6. Driving tips

317

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

●

Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery.

●

Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.

Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

●

To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.

●

Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

4


318

4-6. Driving tips

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

●

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.

●

If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P * .

*

: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

2

3

1

Side chain:

0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter

0.39 in. (10 mm) in width

1.18 in. (30 mm) in length

5

6

4

Cross chain:

0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter

0.55 in. (14 mm) in width

0.98 in. (25 mm) in length

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.


4-6. Driving tips

319

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.

● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 ⎯ 1/2 mile (0.5 ⎯ 1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

WARNING

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the specified size.

● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

■ Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system (if equipped).

4


320

4-6. Driving tips

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.


4-6. Driving tips

321

Utility vehicle precautions

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.

Utility vehicle feature

● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems.

● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause the vehicle to rollover.

WARNING

■ Utility vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:

● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should always fasten their seat belts.

● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped) will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

4


322

4-6. Driving tips

Off-road driving

When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles:

●

Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.

● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property.

●

Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.

● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.

■

Additional information for off-road driving

 For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations:

●

State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments

●

State Motor Vehicle Bureau

●

Recreational Vehicle Clubs

●

U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management


4-6. Driving tips

323

WARNING

■ Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:

● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.

● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.

● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

4


324

4-6. Driving tips

NOTICE

■ To prevent the water damage

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the hybrid battery (traction battery), hybrid system or other components does not occur.

● Water entering the engine compartment may cause severe damage to the hybrid system. Water entering the interior may cause the hybrid battery

(traction battery) stowed under the rear seats to short circuit.

● Water entering the hybrid transmission will cause deterioration in transmission quality. The malfunction indicator may come on, and the vehicle may not be drivable.

● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the hybrid transaxle case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.

■ When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the riverbed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.

■ Inspection after off-road driving

● Sand and mud that has accumulated around brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.

● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.



4-6. Driving tips

325

4

326

Audio system

5

5-1. Basic Operations

Audio system types ........... 328

Audio system .................... 329

Steering wheel audio switches .......................... 333

AUX port/USB port............ 334

Basic audio operations...... 335

5-2. Setup

Setup menu....................... 337

General settings................ 338

Audio settings ................... 341

Display settings................. 342

Voice settings.................... 344

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting the audio

source ............................. 345

List screen operation......... 346

Optimal use of the audio

system ............................ 348

5-4. Using the radio

Radio operation................. 349

5-5. Playing an audio CD and

MP3/WMA/AAC discs

CD player operation .......... 351

CD player and disc

information ...................... 352


327

Audio system

5

5-6. Using an external device

iPod player operation ........ 358

USB memory device

player operation .............. 363

Using the AUX port ........... 368

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth

®

Preparations to use wireless

communication................ 369


® audio player for the

first time .......................... 372


® phone for the

first time .......................... 373


®

device.............................. 374

Connecting a Bluetooth

®

device.............................. 376

Displaying a Bluetooth

®

device details .................. 378

Detailed Bluetooth

®

settings............................ 379

5-8. Bluetooth

®

Audio


®

Audio............................... 381

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

Using a Bluetooth

®

Phone ............................. 383

Making a call ..................... 385

Receiving a call................. 388

Speaking on the phone ..... 389

Bluetooth

®

phone

message function............ 392

Using the steering

wheel switches................ 397

Bluetooth

®

phone

settings ........................... 398

5-10. Phonebook

Contact/Call History

Settings ........................... 400

5-11. Bluetooth

®

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting)............ 410

Bluetooth

®

......................... 414

5-12. Other function

Voice command

system ............................ 420


328

5-1. Basic Operations

Audio system types



Entune Audio

→

P. 329



Entune Audio Plus/Entune Premium Audio with Navigation

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

WARNING

■ Certification for the disc player

● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:


● Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.

This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL

INCREASE EYE HAZARD.

NOTICE


Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.


Audio system

∗

Audio system functions


329

1

2

3

Setup (

→

P. 337, 338, 342)

Audio system and Bluetooth

®

settings can be adjusted.

Audio system (

→

P. 345, 349, 351, 358, 363, 368, 381)

Radio, CD, iPod, USB, AUX and Bluetooth

®

audio can be played.

Bluetooth

®

hands-free system (

→

P. 383)

The driver can make or receive telephone calls without taking their hands off the steering wheel.

5

∗

: If equipped


330


Audio system operation buttons

Operations such as listening to audio, using the hands-free phone, confirming vehicle information and changing audio system settings are started by using the following buttons.

1

2

3

4

“AUDIO” button

Display the “Select Audio Source” screen or audio top screen.

(

→ P. 345)

“CAR” button

Press this button to access the vehicle information system.

(

→

P. 101)

button

Press this button to access the Bluetooth

(

→

P. 383)

®

hands-free system.

“SETUP” button

Press this button to customize the function settings. (

→

P. 337)



331

Touch screen gestures

Operations are performed by touching the screen directly with your finger.

Operation method Outline Main use

Touch

Quickly touch and release once.

Changing and selecting various settings.

Drag

*

Touch the screen with your finger, and move the screen to the desired position.

Scrolling the lists, using scroll bar in lists, etc.

Flick

*

Quickly move the screen by flicking with your finger.

Moving the list screen

(list screen limit).

*

: The above operations may not be performed on all screens. Also if the vehicle reaches a high altitude, it may become hard to perform above functions.

■

Operating conditions

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

■ When using the touch screen

● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating slightly slower than normal.

● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display

Settings” screen ( →

P. 342) or remove your sunglasses.

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’ speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

5


332


NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the touch screen

● To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen buttons with your finger.

● Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.

● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.



Steering wheel audio switches

333

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio system or navigation system.

1

Operating the audio system using the steering wheel switches

Volume switch

• Increases/decreases volume

• Press and hold: Continuously increases/decreases volume

2

Cursor switch (“ ∧ ” and “ ∨ ”)

• AM/FM Radio

Press: Preset station/channel up/down

3

Press and hold: Seek up/down continuously

• CD/ Bluetooth

® audio / iPod / USB memory

Press: Track/file up/down

Press and hold: Fast forward/rewind

“MODE/HOLD” switch

• Changes audio source

• Press and hold this switch to mute or pause the current operation

To cancel the mute or pause, press and hold.

WARNING

■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

5


334


AUX port/USB port

Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player to the AUX port/USB port as indicated below. Select “iPod”,

“USB” or “AUX” on the audio source selection screen and the device can be operated via audio system.

Connecting using the AUX port/USB port

■ iPod

Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.

■

■

USB memory

Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.

Turn on the power of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.

Portable audio player

Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.

Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.

WARNING

■ While driving

Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.



335

Basic audio operations

Basic audio operations and functions common to each mode are explained in this section.

Operating the audio system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Press this knob to turn the audio system on and off, and turn it to adjust the volume.

Press this button to eject a disc

Insert a disc into the disc slot

Press to pause or resume playing music.

Turn this knob to select radio station bands, tracks and files. Also the knob can be used to select items in the list display.

Press the button to seek up or down for a radio station, or to access a desired track or file.

: Select to pause music.

: Select to resume playing music.

5


336


Random playback

Select to change on/off.

Repeat play


■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

WARNING

■ Laser product

This product is a class 1 laser product.

Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself.

Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

● Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.

This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL

INCREASE EYE HAZARD.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.


5-2. Setup

Setup menu

You can adjust the audio system to your desired settings.

337

Display “Setup” screen

6

7

8

1

Press the “SETUP” button to display the “Setup” screen.

Select to adjust the settings for operation sounds, screen animation, etc. (

→

P. 338)

2 Select to display the voice settings screen. (

→

P. 344)

3

4

Select to adjust the settings for contrast and brightness of the screen. (

→ P. 342)

Select to adjust the settings for registering, removing, connecting and disconnecting Bluetooth

®

devices. (

→

P. 379)

5 Select to adjust the settings for contact, message settings, etc.

(

→

P. 400)

Select to set audio settings. (

→

P. 341)

Select to turn the screen off.

Select to set the vehicle customization (

→ P. 631).

5


338

5-2. Setup

General settings

Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds, screen animation, etc.

1

Screen for general settings


2

6

7

8

9

1

2

Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

Select to adjust the clock.

“English”, “Français” or

“Español” can be selected.

3 Select to change the unit of measure for distance/fuel consumption.

4 On/off can be selected to sound beeps.

5 Select to change the screen color.

Select to change the keyboard layout.

The animation effect for the screen can be set to on/off.

Select to delete personal data (

Toyota dealer.

→

P. 340)

Select to update program versions. For details, contact your

10 Select to display the software information. Notices related to third party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.)

■ To return to the default settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.


5-2. Setup

339

Clock

The clock on the Entune Audio can be adjusted by the following procedure.

For vehicles with a navigation system or Entune Audio Plus, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-

UAL”.

Press the “SETUP” button and select “General” and then select

“Clock”.

1

2

3

Adjust hour/minute

Switch AM/PM

Rounds to the nearest hour *

4 Displays in the 24-hour/12-hour format

* e.g.: 1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00

1:30 to 2:00 → 2:00

●

The clock is displayed when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

● When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals, the clock will automatically be set to --:--.

1

2

3

Deleting personal data

Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “Delete”.

Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.

A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.

The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default settings.

• General settings

• Audio settings

• Phone settings

5


340

5-2. Setup

1

2

3

Deleting personal data

Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “Delete”.

Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.

A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.

The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default settings.

• General settings

• Audio settings

• Phone settings


5-2. Setup

341

Audio settings

Settings are available for adjusting the radio operation, cover art, etc.

1

2

Screen for audio settings


2

3

1

Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.

Number of Radio Presets

Select the number of radio preset stations.

Display Cover Art on/off

Automatic Sound Levelizer

1

2

Automatic sound leveliser (ASL)

Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.

Select “High”, “Mid”, “Low” or “Off”.

■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually

The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode separately.

■ About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle speed.

5


342

5-2. Setup

Display settings

Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness of the screen.

1

2

Screen for display settings


Select “Display” on the “Setup” screen.

1

2

Adjust the screen display

Adjust the camera display *

3 Changes to day mode.

*

: If equipped

Day mode

When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.

However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day

Mode”.

The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until

“Day Mode” is selected again.


5-2. Setup

1

2

Adjusting the screen brightness/contrast

Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display Settings” screen.


343

“Brightness”

“Contrast”

“-”

Darker

Weaker

“+”

Brighter

Stronger

5


344

5-2. Setup

Voice settings

This screen is used for setting the voice command guidance system.

1

2

3

4

5

Adjust the voice guidance volume setting.

Set the voice recognition prompts “High”, “Low” or “Off”.

Set the train voice recognition.

Set the voice prompt interrupt on/off.

Set the voice recognition tutorial.




5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting the audio source

345

Switching between audio sources such as radio and CD are explained in this section.

1

2

Changing audio source

Press the “AUDIO” button to display the audio source selection screen.

If the audio source selection screen is not displayed, press the “AUDIO” button again.

1

Select the desired audio source.

Select the desired audio source then or to reorder.

5

Using the steering wheel switches to change audio source

The audio source changes as follows each time the “MODE/HOLD” switch is pressed.


346


List screen operation

When a list screen is displayed, use the appropriate buttons to scroll through the list.

How to scroll

: Select to scroll to the next or previous page.

: If appears to the right of titles, the complete titles are too long for the display. Select this button to scroll the title.

Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to move the cursor box to select a desired item from the list, and press the knob to play it. The track that is being played is highlighted.

To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.



347

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs

■ Selecting a track/file/song

Press the “SEEK >” button or “< TRACK” button, or turn the

“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired track/file/song number.

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the “SEEK >” button or

“< TRACK” button.

■ Selecting a track/file/song from the track/file/song list

1 Select “Browse” or cover art.

2 Select the desired track/file/ song.

When an MP3/WMA/AAC disc or USB memory device is being used, the folder can be selected. When a Bluetooth

®

device or iPod is being used, the album can be selected.

According to the audio device, the following is displayed.

Audio source

Audio CD

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

USB

Bluetooth

® iPod

List name

Track

Folder, File

Artist, Album, Song, Genre, Composer,

Album, Track

Playlist, Artist, Album, Genre,

Audiobook, Composer, Song, Video,

Podcast

5


348


Optimal use of the audio system

On the “Sound Settings” screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/

Bass), volume balance can be adjusted.

How to adjust the sound settings and sound quality

1 2 3 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the treble, mid or bass to a level between -5 and 5.

4 5 Select “Front” or “Rear” to adjust the front/rear audio balance.

6 7 Select “L” or “R” to adjust the left/right audio balance.


5-4. Using the radio

349

Radio operation

Select “AM” or “FM” on the audio source selection screen to begin listening to the radio.

Audio control screen

Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

1 Audio source selection screen appears

2

3

Preset stations

Select to display RBDS text messages *

4 Scanning for receivable station

5

6

Select to display a list of receivable stations

Setting the sound (

→

P. 348)

* : FM only

Selecting a station

Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.

■ Seek tuning

Press the “SEEK >” button or “< TRACK” button.

The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop when a station is found.

■ Manual tuning

Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob.

■ Preset stations

Select the desired preset station.

5


350

5-4. Using the radio

Setting station presets

1 Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob or pressing the “SEEK >” button or “< TRACK” button.

2 Select “(add new)”.

To change the preset station to a different one, select and hold the preset station.

Select “Yes”.

3

4 Select “OK” after setting the new preset station.

■ Refreshing the station list

1 Select “Refresh” on the “Station List” screen.

To cancel the refresh, select “Cancel Refresh”.

■

Reception sensitivity

● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

● The radio antenna is mounted on the roof.


5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

CD player operation

351

Insert disc or select “CD” on the audio source selection screen with a disc inserted to begin listening to a CD.


3

4

5

1


Audio source selection screen appears

2

6

Displaying the track/file list/ folder list

Random playback ( → P. 336)

Repeat play ( → P. 336)

Pause

Select to resume play

Setting the sound (

→ P. 348)

■

Displaying the title and artist name

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.

5


352


CD player and disc information

Error messages

If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Message

“Check DISC”

“Disc Error”

“No music files found.”

Cause/Correction procedures

• The disc is dirty or damaged. Clean the disc.

• The disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc correctly.

• The disc is not playable with the player. Confirm the disc is playable with the player.

There is a malfunction within the system. Eject the disc.

No playable data is included on the disc. Eject the disc.

CD discs

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.

■ If a disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.



353

■ MP3, WMA and AAC files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

●

MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

●

WMA file compatibility


WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Windows Media Audio

Standard)


32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)

5


354


●

AAC file compatibility


MPEG4/AAC-LC


11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

16-320 (kbps)

●

Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are

CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or

CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

UDF (2.01 or lower)

MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

●

File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.

●

Discs containing multi-session recordings

As the audio system is compatible with multi session discs, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files.

However, only the first session can be played.



355

●

ID3, WMA and AAC tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3

ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and

1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

●

MP3, WMA and AAC playback

When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write any files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or

AAC format data cannot be played.

●

Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

5


356


●

Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of

44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.



NOTICE

■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs.

Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.

Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

357

● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm).

● Low-quality or deformed discs.

● Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.

● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off.

■ Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself.

● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.

● Do not apply oil to the player.

● Store discs away from direct sunlight.

● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

5


358

5-6. Using an external device

iPod player operation

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

Select “iPod” on the audio source selection screen.

When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only output the sound by selecting the browse screen.

Connecting an iPod

→

P. 334


4

5

6

2

3

1



Displays cover art

7

Selecting the play mode

(

→

P. 359)

Shuffle play (

→

P. 359)

Repeat play (

→

P. 359)

Pause

Select to resume playback

Setting the sound (

→ P. 348)



359

1

2

Selecting a play mode

Select “Browse” on the screen.

Select the desired play mode by selecting the “Playlists”, “Artists”,

“Albums”, “Songs”, “Podcasts”, “Audio books”, “Genres”, “Composers” or “Videos” tab. Then select a song to begin using the selected play mode.

Shuffle play


Repeat play


5


360


■

About iPod

●

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

■ iPod cover art

●

Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.

● This function can be changed to on/off. ( →

P. 341)

● It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.

● Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.

■ iPod functions

● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

●

Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.

● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system instead.

● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge the iPod before use.

● Compatible models ( → P. 362)



361

■ iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.

■ Error messages


Message

“Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to connect the iPod.”

Cause/Correction procedures

This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

“No music files found.”

“No videos found.”

This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

This indicates that no video files are included in the iPod.

“Please check the iPod firmware version.”

“iPod authorization unsuccessful.”

This indicates that the software version is not compatible.

Please check the compatible models.

(

→

P. 362)

This indicates that the audio system failed to authorize the iPod.

Please check your iPod.

5


362


■ Compatible models

The following iPod ® , iPod nano ® , iPod classic devices can be used with this system.

® , iPod touch ® and iPhone ®

● Made for

• iPod touch (5th generation)

• iPod touch (4th generation)

• iPod touch (3rd generation)

• iPod touch (2nd generation)

• iPod touch (1st generation)

• iPod classic

• iPod with video

• iPod nano (7th generation)




• iPod nano (3rd generation)

• iPod nano (2nd generation)

• iPod nano (1st generation)

• iPhone 5s

• iPhone 5c

• iPhone 5

• iPhone 4S

• iPhone 4

• iPhone 3GS

• iPhone 3G

• iPhone

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.

WARNING


Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals

● Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.



USB memory device player operation

363

Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

Touch “USB” on the audio source selection screen.

Connecting a USB memory device

→

P. 334


4

5

2

3

6

1



7

Displays cover art

Displaying the folder list

Random playback (

→

P. 336)

Repeat play (

→

P. 336)

Pause

Select to resume playback

Setting the sound (

→

P. 348)

5


364


■

USB memory functions

● Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.

● If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory.

■

Error messages for USB memory


Message Cause/Correction procedures

“Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to connect the USB device.”

This indicates a problem with the USB memory device or its connection.

“There are no files available for playback. Please add compatible files to your USB device.”

This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included on the USB memory device.



365

■ USB memory

● Compatible devices

USB memory device that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback.

● Compatible device formats

The following device format can be used:

• USB communication format: USB2.0 HS (480Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)

• File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)

• Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999

• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

● MP3, WMA and AAC files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

5


366


● MP3 file compatibility


MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,

MPEG2.5)


MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

● WMA file compatibility


WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9


HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)


HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)

● AAC file compatibility


MPEG4/AAC-LC


11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)


16-320 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch

●

File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

● ID3, WMA and AAC tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.



367

● MP3, WMA and AAC playback

• When a device containing MP3, WMA and AAC files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA and AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.

• When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reconnected (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than

MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).

● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3,

WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

WARNING


Do not connect a USB memory device or operate the device controls.

5

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals

● Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory device while it is connected.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.


368


Using the AUX port

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting a portable audio player

→ P. 334


Press the “AUDIO” button to display the audio control screen, then select “AUX”.

■ Operating portable audio players connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio player itself.

■ When using a portable audio player connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio player.

WARNING


Do not connect a portable audio player or operate the device controls.


5-7. Connecting Bluetooth

®

369

Preparations to use wireless communication

The following can be performed using Bluetooth

®

wireless communication:

■ A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via audio system

■ Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone

In order to use wireless communication, register and connect a

Bluetooth

®

device by performing the following procedures.

5


370


®

Device registration/connection flow

1. Register the Bluetooth

®

device to be used with audio system (

→

P. 372, 373, 374)

2. Connect the Bluetooth

®

device to be used

(

→

P. 376)

To be used for audio To be used for hands-free phone

3. Start Bluetooth

®

connection (

→

P. 376)

3. Start Bluetooth

®

connection (

→

P. 376)

4. Check connection status

(

→

P. 381)

4. Check connection status

(

→

P. 384)

5. Use Bluetooth

®

audio

(

→ P. 381)

5. Use Bluetooth

®

phone

(

→ P. 383)



®

371

Registering and connecting from the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen

To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button and select “Bluetooth * ” on the “Setup” screen.

1

2

Select to connect the device to be used with audio system.

(

→

P. 376)

Select to register a Bluetooth

® device to be used with audio system. (

→

P. 374)

3

4

Select to set detailed

Bluetooth

(

→

P. 379)

®

system settings.

Select to delete registered devices. (

→

P. 375)

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

5


372


®

Registering a Bluetooth

®

the first time

audio player for

To use the Bluetooth

®

Audio, it is necessary to register an audio player with the system.

Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use the

Bluetooth

®

Audio.

For details about registering a Bluetooth

®

device (

→

P. 374)

3

4

1

2

5

Turn the Bluetooth

®

connection setting of your audio player on.

Press the “AUDIO” button.

Select “ Audio”.

Select “Select Device”.

Follow the steps in “How to register a Bluetooth

®

device” from 2 .

(

→

P. 374)



®

373


®

time

phone for the first

To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a

Bluetooth

®

phone with the system.

Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use the hands-free system.

This operation cannot be performed while driving.

For details about registering a Bluetooth

®

device (

→ P. 374)

1

2

3

4

Turn the Bluetooth

®

connection setting of your cellular phone on.

Press the “ ” button.

Select “OK” to register a phone.

Follow the steps in “How to registering a Bluetooth

®

device” from

3 . (

→

P. 374)

5


374


®


®

device

Bluetooth

®

compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players

(AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5

Bluetooth

®

devices.

4

3

2

How to register a Bluetooth

®

device

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (

→

P. 371)

* : Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Select “Add”.

When this screen is displayed, search for the device name displayed on this screen on the screen of your Bluetooth

® device.

For details about operating the

Bluetooth

®

device, see the manual that comes with it.

To cancel the registration, select

“Cancel”.

Register the Bluetooth

®

device using your Bluetooth

®

device.

A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible

Bluetooth

®

devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth

®

device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the

Bluetooth

®

device’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth

®

device according to the confirmation message.


5 Check that this screen is displayed when registration is complete.


®

375

6 Select “OK” when the connection status changes from “Connecting...” to “Connected”.

If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

Registration can be performed from screens other than the

“Bluetooth* Setup” screen.

■ When registering from the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen. (

→

P. 345)

2

3

Select “Select Device”.

Follow the steps in “How to registering a Bluetooth

®

device” from

2 . ( →

P. 374)

*


5

3

4

2

Deleting a Bluetooth

®

device


→

P. 371)


Select “Remove”.

Select the desired device.

A confirmation message will be displayed, select “Yes” to delete the device.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

■

When deleting a Bluetooth

®

phone

The contact data will be deleted at the same time.

5


376


®

Connecting a Bluetooth

®

device

Up to 5 Bluetooth

®

devices (Phones (HFP) and audio players

(AVP)) can be registered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth

®

device has been registered, select which device to connect to.

How to select a Bluetooth

®

device

3

1

2


Select “Bluetooth*”.

*


Select the device to be connected.

1

Supported profile icons will be displayed.

Phone

2 Audio player

Supported profile icons for currently connected devices will illuminate.

Dimmed icons can be selected to connect to the function directly.



®

377

Auto connection

To turn auto connection mode on, set “Bluetooth* Power” to on.

(

→

P. 379)

When you register a phone, auto connection will be activated. Always set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth

®

phone in a place where a connection can be established.

When the power switch is turned to ON mode, the system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.

Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the phones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is displayed.


Manual connection

When auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, you must connect the Bluetooth

®

device manually.

*


Follow the steps in “Connecting a Bluetooth

®

device” from 1 .

(

→ P. 376)

■ When connecting from the Bluetooth

®

audio control screen

 Registering an additional device

Select “Select Device” on the Bluetooth

®

audio control screen.

For more information:

→

P. 374

 Selecting a registered device

Select “Select Device” on the Bluetooth

®

audio control screen.

For more information:

→

P. 376

■

Reconnecting a Bluetooth

®

phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the power switch in ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.

If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, the connection must be made manually, or the phone must be reselected.

5


378


®

Displaying a Bluetooth

®

device details

You can confirm and change the registered device details.

3

4

2

Bluetooth

®

device registration status


→

P. 371)


Select the device.

Select “Device Info”.

1

2

3

4

Following screen is displayed:

Device Name

Change connection method

Bluetooth

®

Address

Display your telephone number

The number may not be displayed depending on the model of phone.

5 Compatibility profile of the device

6 Restore default settings

1

2

Changing connection method

Select “Connect Audio Player from”.

Select “Vehicle” or “Device”.

“Vehicle”: Connect the audio system to the portable audio player.

“Device”: Connect the portable audio player to the audio system



®

Detailed Bluetooth

®

settings

You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth

®

settings.

379

1

How to check and change detailed Bluetooth

®

settings

Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (

→

P. 371)

2 Select “System Settings”.

3

1

2

3

4

5

The following screen is displayed:

Bluetooth * Power on/off

You can change Bluetooth

* function on/off

Bluetooth * Name

Change PIN-code (

→

P. 380)

Bluetooth * Address

Display Phone Status

6

You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting a telephone

Display Audio Player Status

You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting an audio player

Compatibility profile of the system 7

8 Restore default settings


5


380


®

Editing the Bluetooth* PIN

You can change the PIN-code that is used to register your Bluetooth

® devices in the system.

1

2

Select “Bluetooth* PIN”.

Input a PIN-code, and select “OK”.

*



5-8. Bluetooth

®

Audio

Listening to Bluetooth

®

Audio

381

The Bluetooth

®

audio system enables the user to enjoy music played on a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.

When a Bluetooth

®

device cannot be connected, check the connection status on the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect the device. (

→

P. 376)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Status display

1

2

You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on the screen.

Connection status

Battery charge

The battery charge indicator may not be displayed depending on the connected device.

5

Indicators

Connection status

Battery charge

Good

Full

Conditions

Not connected

Empty


382

5-8. Bluetooth

®

Audio

Playing Bluetooth

®

audio

Select or to Play/Pause.

For details on “Bluetooth * Audio” screen operation methods, refer to

Basic Audio Operations. (

→

P. 335)

For details on how to select a track or album, refer to selecting, fastforwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs. (

→

P. 347)

*



Using a Bluetooth

®

Phone

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

383

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth

®

. Bluetooth

®

is a wireless data system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.

Before making a phone call, check the connection status, battery charge, call area and signal strength. (

→

P. 384)

If a Bluetooth

®

device cannot be connected, check the connection status on the phone screen. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect it. (

→

P. 376)

Phone screen

To display the screen shown below, press the switch on the steering wheel or the button.

1

2

Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is displayed by selecting the 4 tabs.

Device name

Bluetooth

®

connection status

5


384

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

■

■

Telephone switch (

→

P. 397)

Microphone

The vehicle’s built in microphone is used when talking on the phone.

The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must register your

Bluetooth

®

phone in the system. (

→

P. 374)

Status display

1

2

3

You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on the phone screen.

Connection status

Signal strength

Battery charge

Indicators

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Good

Full

Conditions

Poor Not connected

Empty

Excellent

“Rm”: Roaming area

Poor


5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

385

Making a call

Once a Bluetooth

®

phone is registered, you can make a call using the following procedure:

1

Dialing

Display the phone screen. (

→

P. 383)

2 Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter a phone number.

3

To delete the input phone number, select .

For the first digit, you can enter “+” by selecting “ ∗ ” for a while.

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

Dialing from the contacts list

2

3

1

You can dial a number from the contact data imported from your cellular phone. The system has one contact list for each registered phone.

Up to 2500 contacts may be stored in each contact list.


→

P. 383)

Select “Contacts” tab.

Choose the desired contact to call from the list.

4 Choose the number and then press the wheel or select .

switch on the steering

When the contact is empty

You can transfer the phone numbers in a Bluetooth

®

phone to the system.

Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth

®

phones. If the cellular phone does not support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile) service, you cannot transfer contacts.

5


386

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

■ For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

®

phones

1

 When “Automatic Contact/History Transfer” is set to off


1 Select to transfer new contacts from a cellular phone, select “Always” and then enable “Automatic Contact/History Transfer”.

2 Select to transfer all the contacts from a connected cellular phone only once.

■

3 Select to cancel transferring.

For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth

® phones

1

1


Select to transfer the contacts from the connected cellular phone.

2 Select to add a new contact manually.

3 Select to cancel transferring.

 When “Transfer” is selected

2 Follow the steps in “Update contacts from phone” from 2 .

(

→

P. 402)

 When “Add” is selected

2 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contacts list” from 2 . (

→ P. 403)


5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

387

Calling using favorites list

1

You can make a call using numbers registered in the contact.

Display the phone screen. ( →

P. 383)

2 Select “Favorites” tab.

3 Select the desired number to make a call.

Dialing from call history

You can make a call using the call history, which has the 3 functions below.

: calls which you missed

1

2

3

: calls which you received

: calls which you made


→

P. 383)

Select “Call History” tab.

Select or the desired entry from the list.

4

 When is selected

Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

4

5

 When the desired contact is selected

Select the desired number.

Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

■ Call history list

● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the contact list, the name is displayed in the call history.

● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the call history.

■ International calls

You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in use.

5


388

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

Receiving a call

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a sound.

To answer the phone


To refuse a call


To adjust the incoming call volume

Turn the “PWR VOL” knob. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.

■ International calls

Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone in use.


5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

389

Speaking on the phone

The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

To adjust the call volume

Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches or the volume knob.

To prevent the other party from hearing your voice

Select “Mute”.

Inputting tones

1

When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the contact list.

Select “0-9”.

2 Input the number.

■ Release Tones

“Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w) is registered in the contact list.

Select “Release Tones”.

5


390

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

■

Release Tones

● A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of numbers and the characters p or w. (e.g.056133w0123p#1

∗

)

●

When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after a user operation is performed.

● Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based service such as an answering machine or bank phone service is desired. A phone number with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact list.

●

Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be operated on voice command during a call.

To transfer a call

Turn the “Handset mode” on to switch from a hands-free call to a cellular phone call.

Turn the “Handset mode” off to switch from a cellular phone call to a hands-free call.

1

2

3

Transmit volume setting

Select “Transmit Volume”.

Select the desired level for the transmit volume.

Select “OK”.

To hang up



5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

391

Call waiting

When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming call message will be displayed.

To talk with the other party:

• Press the switch on the steering wheel.

• Select .

To refuse the call:

• Press the switch on the steering wheel.

• Select .

Every time you press the switch on the steering wheel or select

during call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.

■ Transferring calls

● If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.

● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used.

● For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.

■ Call waiting operation

Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cellular phone.

5


392

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

Bluetooth

®

phone message function

Received messages can be forwarded from the connected

Bluetooth

®

phone, enabling checking and replying using the audio system.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth

®

phone connected, received messages may not be transferred to the message inbox.

If the phone does not support the message function, this function cannot be used.

1

2

Displaying “Message Inbox” screen

Press the

Select .

button.

Receiving a message

1

2

3

When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen.

Select to check the message.

Select to refuse the message.

Select to call the message sender.


5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

393

■

Receiving a message

● Depending on the cellular phone used for receiving messages, or its registration status with the navigation system, some information may not be displayed.

● The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/

MMS messages under the following conditions:

E-mail:

• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to “Full Screen”. (

→

P. 408)

• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on. ( →

P. 408)

SMS/MMS:

• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is set to “Full screen”. (

→ P. 408)

• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set to on. (

→

P. 408)

5


394

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

1

2

Checking the messages

Display the “Message Inbox” screen. (

→

P. 392)

Select the desired message from the list.

3

1

Check that the message is displayed.

E-mails: Select “Mark

Unread” or “Mark Read” to mark mail unread or read on the message inbox screen.

2

3

4

5

This function is available when

“Update Message Read Status on Phone” is set to on (

→ P. 408)

Select to make a call to the sender.

Select to have messages read out. To cancel this function, select

“Stop”.

Select to display the previous or next message.

Select to reply the message.


5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

395

■

Check the messages

● Depending on the type of Bluetooth

®

phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

●

Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth

®

phone’s registered mail address folder.

Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.

●

Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth

®

phone can be displayed.

● The text of the message is not displayed while driving.

● When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, messages will be automatically read out. (

→

P. 408)

●

Turn the “PWR VOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel to adjust the message read out volume.

● The message read out function is available even while driving.

4

5

2

3

1

Replying to a message


→

P. 392)

Select the desired message from the list.

Select “Quick Message”.

Select the desired message.

Select “Send”.

If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

■ Editing quick reply message

1 Select “Quick Message”.

2

3

Select corresponding to the desired message to edit.

Select “OK” when editing is completed.

5


396

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

Calling the message sender

1

Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender’s phone number.


→

P. 392)

2 Select the desired message.

3 Select .

4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

■ Calling from a number within a message

Calls can be made to a number identified in a message’s text area.

2

3

1

This operation cannot be performed while driving.


→

P. 392)

Select the desired message.

Select the text area.

4 Select corresponding to the desired number.

5 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

■ Calling from the incoming message screen

→

P. 391


5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

Using the steering wheel switches

397

The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected cellular phone.

1

Operating a telephone using the steering wheel switches

Volume switch

• Increase/Decrease the volume

• Press and hold:

Continuously increase/ decrease the volume

2 Off hook switch

• Make a call

• Receive a call

• Display “Phone” screen

3 On hook switch

• End a call

• Refuse a call

5


398

5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

Bluetooth

®

phone settings

You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.

“Phone/Message Settings” screen

2

3

1

To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button, and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

4

5

Set the phone connection

(

→

P. 374)

Setting the sound (

→

P. 399)

Contact/Call History Settings

(

→

P. 400)

Set the message settings

(

→

P. 408)

Set the phone display

(

→

P. 409)


5-9. Bluetooth

®

Phone

399

1

2

Sound setting

Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (

→

P. 398)

Select “Sound Settings” on the “Phone/Message Settings” screen.

1

2

3

Set the desired ringtone.

Adjust the ringtone volume.

4

Adjust the message readout volume.

Set the desired incoming

SMS/MMS tone.

5

6

7

Adjust the incoming SMS/

MMS tone volume.

Set the incoming e-mail tone.

8

Adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume.

Adjust the default volume of the other party’s voice.



5


400

5-10. Phonebook

Contact/Call History Settings

The contact can be transferred from a Bluetooth

®

phone to the system. The contact also can be added, edited and deleted.

The call history can be deleted and contact and favorites can be changed.

1

“Contact/Call History Settings” screen


→

P. 398)

2 Select “Contact/Call History Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

1 For PBAP compatible

Bluetooth

®

phones, select to set “Automatic Transfer” on/ off. When set to on, the phone’s contact data and history are automatically transferred.

2 Select to update contacts from the connected phone.

(

→

P. 401)

3

4

5

Select to sort contacts by the first name or last name field.

Select to add contacts to the favorites list. (

→ P. 405)

Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. (

→

P. 407)

7

8

6

9

10

Select to display contact images.

Select to clear contacts from the call history.

*

Select to add new contacts to the contact list.

* (

→ P. 403)

Select to edit contacts in the contact list.

* (

→

P. 404)

Select to delete contacts from the contact list.

* (

→

P. 405)

11 Select to reset all setup items.

*

: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

®

phones only, this function is available when “Automatic Contact/History Transfer” is set to off.


5-10. Phonebook

401

Update contacts from phone

Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth

®

phones.

If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred.

■ For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

®

Phones

1 Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the

Bluetooth

®

phone.

If another Bluetooth

®

device is connected when transferring contact data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth

®

device may need to be disconnected.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth

®

phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

5


402

5-10. Phonebook

■ For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth

®

Phones

1

2

Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.

Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth

® phone.

This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the

Bluetooth

®

phone.

To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.


■ Updating the contacts in a different way (From the “Call History” screen)

1

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

®

phones, this function is available when “Automatic Contact/History Transfer” is set to off. ( →

P. 400)


→

P. 383)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list.

3

4

5

Select “Update Contact”.

Select the desired contact.

Select a phone type for the phone number.


5-10. Phonebook

403

Registering a new contact to the contact list

2

3

4

1

New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can be registered. For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

®

phones, this function is available when “Automatic Contact/History Transfer” is set to off.

(

→ P. 400)

Select “New Contact”.

Enter the name and select “OK”.

Enter the phone number and select “OK”.

Select the phone type for the phone number.

5

2

To add another number to this contact, select “Yes”.

■

1

Registering a new contact in a different way (From the “Call

History” screen)


→

P. 383)

Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list.

3

4

Select “Add to Contacts”.

Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contacts list” from 3 .

5


404

5-10. Phonebook

1

2

Editing the contact data


®

phones, this function is available when “Automatic Contact/History Transfer” is set to off. (

→

P. 400)

Select “Edit Contact”.

Select the desired contact.

3 Select corresponding to the desired name or number.

4

 For editing the name

Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contacts list” from .

P. 403)

 For editing the number

4 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contacts list” from .

P. 403)

■

1

Editing the contacts in a different way (From the “Contact

Details” screen)


→

P. 383)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact.

3

4


“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for the contact.

Follow the steps in “Editing the contact data” from 4 .


5-10. Phonebook

405

1

2

Deleting the contact data


®

phones, this function is available when “Automatic Contact/History Transfer” is set to off. (

→

P. 400)

Select “Delete Contacts”.

Select the desired contact and select “Delete”.

3

2

Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.

■

1

Deleting the contact in a different way (From the “Contact

Details” screen)


→

P. 383)

Select the “Contacts”, “Call history” tab or the “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact.

3

4



Favorites list setting

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be registered in the favorites list.

■ Registering the contacts in the favorites list

1

2

Select “Add Favorite”.

Select the desired contact to add to the favorites list.

3

Dimmed contacts are already stored as a favorite.


5


406

5-10. Phonebook

2

3

1

 When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list

When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list, a registered contact needs to be replaced.

Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears to replace a contact.

Select the contact to be replaced.


1

 Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the “Contacts” screen)


→

P. 383)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.

3 Select at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be registered in the favorites list.

When selected, is changed to , and the contact is registered in the favorites list.

1

 Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the “Contact Details” screen)


→

P. 383)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab or the “Call History” tab and select the desired contact.

3 Select “Add Favorite”.



5-10. Phonebook

407

■ Deleting the contacts in the favorites list

1

2

Select “Remove Favorite”.

Select the desired contacts and select “Remove”.

3

4



1

 Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the

“Contacts” screen)

Display the phone screen. ( →

P. 383)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.

3 Select at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted from the favorites. list.

3

4

5

When selected, is changed to , and the data is deleted from the list.

1

 Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the

“Contact Details” screen)


→

P. 383)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact to delete.

Select “Remove Favorite”.



5


408

5-10. Phonebook

1

2

Message Settings


→

P. 398)

Select “Messaging Settings”.

3

1

Select the desired item to be set.

Set automatic message transfer on/off.

2 Set automatic message readout on/off.

3 Set the SMS/MMS notification popup on/off.

4 Set the e-mail notification popup on/off.

5 Set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing messages on/off.

6

7

8

9

Set updating message read status on phone on/off.

Change the incoming SMS/MMS display.

“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, the incoming

SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen.

“Drop-Down”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

Change the incoming e-mail display.

“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display screen is the displayed and can be operated on the screen.

“Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

Set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off.

When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone will be displayed.

■

To return to the default settings



5-10. Phonebook

409

■ Displaying the “Messaging Settings” screen in a different way

1 Display the phone screen. (

→

P. 383)

2 Select .

3

4

Select “Settings”.

Select “Message Settings”.

1

2

3

Phone Display Settings


→ P. 398)

Select “Phone Display Settings”.

1

Select the desired item to be set.

Change the incoming call display.

2

“Full Screen”: When a call is received, the hands-free screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen.

“Drop-Down”: A message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

Set display of the contact/ history transfer completion message on/off.

5

■

To return to the default settings



410

5-11. Bluetooth

®

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth

® device, first check the table below.

 When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth

®

device

The hands-free system or Bluetooth

®

device does not work.

The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth

®

cellular phone.

→

For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/entune/

The Bluetooth version of the connected cellular phone may be older than the specified version.

→ Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth version 2.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 3.0 with EDR or higher). ( →

P. 414)


 When registering/connecting a cellular phone

5-11. Bluetooth

®

411

A cellular phone cannot be registered.

An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone.

→ Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.

The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone side.

→ Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve registration on the phone).

Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.

→ Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. ( →

P. 375)

A Bluetooth

®

connection cannot be made.

Another Bluetooth

®

device is already connected.

→ Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system. ( →

P. 377)

Bluetooth

®

function is not enabled on the cellular phone.

→ Enable the Bluetooth

®

function on the cellular phone.

Automatic Bluetooth

®

connection on this system is set to off.

→ Set automatic Bluetooth

®

connection on this system to on when the power switch is turned to ON mode. ( →

P. 377)

“Please check your device settings.” message is displayed.

Bluetooth

®

function is not enabled on the cellular phone.

→ Enable the Bluetooth

®

function on the cellular phone.

Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.

→

Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. (

→

P. 375)

5

 When making/receiving a call

A call cannot be made/received.

Your vehicle is in a “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.” area.

→ Move to where “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.” no longer appears on the display.


412

5-11. Bluetooth

®

 When using the contact list

Contact data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.

The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible with transferring contact data.

→ For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/entune/

Automatic contact transfer function on this system is set to off.

→ Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to on.

(

→

P. 400)

Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.

→ Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).

Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed.

→

Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer operation on the phone).

Contact data cannot be edited.

Automatic contact transfer function on this system is set to on.

→ Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to off.

(

→

P. 400)

 When using the Bluetooth

®

message function

Messages cannot be viewed.

Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone.

→ Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message transfer on the phone).

Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off.

→ Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (

→ P. 408)

New message notifications are not displayed.

Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.

→ Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on.

(

→

P. 408)

Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone.

→ Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone. ( →

P. 408)


5-11. Bluetooth

®

413

 In other situations

The Bluetooth

®

connection status is displayed at the top of the screen each time the power switch is turned to ON mode.

Connection confirmation display on this system is set to on.

→ To turn off the display, set connection confirmation display on this system to off. (

→ P. 379)

Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.

The cellular phone is not close enough to this system.

→ Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.

The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.

→ Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack, and then restart the cellular phone.

→ Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth

®

connection.

→

Stop the cellular phone’s security software and close all applications.

→

Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its source and how its operation might affect this system.

5


414

5-11. Bluetooth

®

Bluetooth

®

■ When using the Bluetooth

®

audio system

● In the following conditions, the system may not function.

• If the portable audio player is turned off

• If the portable audio player is not connected

• If the portable audio player’s battery is low

● There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during

Bluetooth

®

audio play.

● Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.

■ When using the hands-free system

● The audio system is muted when making a call.

● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.

●

If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

If the Bluetooth

®

phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may deteriorate and connection status may deteriorate.

●

In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• When driving on unpaved roads

• When driving at high speeds

• If a roof or window is open

• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate

● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth

®

● If the cellular phone is turned off

● If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage

●

If the cellular phone is not connected

● If the cellular phone’s battery is low

● When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.

● When the cellular phone itself cannot be used

● When transferring contact data from the cellular phone


5-11. Bluetooth

®

415

■ Bluetooth

®

antenna

The antenna is built into the display.

If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.

If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.

■ Battery charge/signal status

● This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or cellular phone itself.

● This system does not have a charging function.

● The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly when the device is connected to Bluetooth

®

.

■ When using the Bluetooth

®

audio and hands-free system at the same time

The following problems may occur.

● The Bluetooth

®

audio connection may be interrupted.

● Noise may be heard during Bluetooth

®

audio playback.

■ About the contact in this system

The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.

● Contact data

● Call history

●

Favorite

● Message

When removing a Bluetooth

®

phone from the system, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.

■ About Bluetooth

®

The Bluetooth

®

word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Fujitsu Ten Limited is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

5


416

5-11. Bluetooth

®

■ Compatible models

The Bluetooth

®

audio system supports portable audio players with the following specifications

● Bluetooth

®

specifications:

Ver. 2.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)

● Profiles:

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher

(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)

This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the audio system.

• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)

This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.

However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable audio player connected.

The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifications.

● Bluetooth

®

specification:

Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)

● Profiles:

• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or higher)

This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or head set. It has outgoing and incoming call functions.

• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)

This is a profile to transfer contact data. When a Bluetooth

®

compatible cellular phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.

• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended:

Ver. 1.1)

This is a profile to transfer contact data.

• MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the hands-free system. OPP, PBAP or MAP services must be selected individually.


5-11. Bluetooth

®

417

■ Reconnecting the portable audio player

If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the power switch is in ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.

If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions below to reconnect:

● Select the portable audio player again

● Enter the portable audio player

■ When you sell your car

Be sure to delete your personal data. (

→ P. 340)

■ Certification

5


418

5-11. Bluetooth

®


5-11. Bluetooth ®

419

WARNING


Do not operate the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to the Bluetooth ® system.

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth ® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth ® antennas. The radio waves

● may affect the operation of such devices.

Before using Bluetooth ® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

■ When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable audio player or cellular phone.

5


420

5-12. Other function

Voice command system

The voice command system enables the hands-free system to be operated using voice commands.

1

Using the voice command system

Press the talk switch.

1

2

Select to train voice recognition.

Select to start the voice recognition tutorial.

2 Select “OK” and say the desired command.

On the list screen, you can select the desired command.

To cancel the voice command system, press and hold the talk switch.



421

■

Microphone

→ P. 384

■ When using the microphone

●

It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.

● When “Voice Prompt Interrupt” is set on, it is not necessary to wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command. (

→

P. 344)

●

Voice commands may not be recognized if:

• They are spoken too quickly.

• They are spoken at a low or high volume.

• The roof or windows are open.

• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.

• The air conditioning speed is set high.

• The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.

● In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not be possible:

• The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.

• There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.

Casual speech recognization

Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every variation of each command.

In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly state the desired operation.

Not all voice commands are displayed in the shortcut menu.

This function is available in English, Spanish and French.

■ Expression examples for each function

Command

“Call <name>

<type>”

“Dial <number>”

Expression examples

Get me <Robert Brown>.

I need to call <Robert Brown> at <Work> right away.

Please dial the number <3334445555>.

Ring <3334445555>.

5


422


Command list

Some recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below as examples.

 Basic

Command

“Help”

Action

Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands or operation methods

Returns to the previous screen “Go Back”

 Phone

Command Action

“Redial”

“Call Back”

Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing call

Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call

“Show Recent

Calls”

Displays the call history screen

“Dial <phone number>”

Places a call to the said phone number

“Call <contacts>

<phonetypes>”

Places a call to the said phone type of the contact from the phone book



423

1

Mobile Assistant

The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri

®

Eyes Free mode via the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible cellular phone must be registered and connected to this system via Bluetooth

®

. (

→ P. 370)

Press and hold the you hear the beeps.

until

2 The Mobile Assistant can be used only when the following screen is displayed.

To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select “Cancel”, or press and hold the on the steering wheel.

To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the

on the steering wheel.

• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds to a voice command.

• After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will automatically end to complete the requested action.

■ Adjusting the Mobile Assistant volume

The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the

“PWR/VOL” knob or steering wheel volume control switches. The

Mobile Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized.

5


424


■

Notes about Mobile Assistant

● The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version installed on the connected device.

●

Some Siri

®

features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an unavailable function, Siri

®

will inform you that the function is not available.

● If Siri

®

is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth

®

, an error message will be displayed on the screen.

●

While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used.

●

If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio source is Bluetooth

®

audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction prompts.


425


6

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger


system............................. 426

Heated steering wheel/seat heaters.......... 434

• Heated steering

wheel ............................ 435

• Seat heaters ................. 435

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ................ 436

• Interior lights ................. 437

• Personal lights .............. 437

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features ..... 439

• Glove box...................... 440

• Console box.................. 440

• Cup holders .................. 441

• Bottle holders................ 442

• Auxiliary box ................. 442

Luggage compartment features ........................... 443

6-4. Using the other interior features

Other interior features ....... 453

• Sun visors .................... 453

• Vanity mirrors ............... 453

• Power outlets ................ 454

• Armrest ......................... 455

• Coat hooks.................... 455

• Assist grips .................. 456

Garage door opener.......... 457

Compass........................... 464


426

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Control panel

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

Turn clockwise to increase the temperature and turn the knob counterclockwise to decrease the temperature.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.

Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is on):

The driver’s side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the temperature for the driver’s and passenger’s side. At this time, operate the passenger’s side temperature control dial to enter individual mode.

Individual mode (the indicator on is off):

The temperature for the driver’s and passenger’s side can be adjusted separately.



■ Adjusting the fan speed setting

427

Press “

∧

”on to increase the fan speed and “

∨

” to decrease the fan speed.

Press to turn the fan off.

■ Changing the airflow mode

To change the air outlets, press “

∧

”or “

∨

”on .

1

2

3

4

The air outlets used are switched each time either side of the button is pressed.

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

6

Using the automatic mode

1 Press .

The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting and humidity.

2 Adjust the temperature setting.

■ Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.


428


Other functions

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (the indicator is off) and recirculated air mode (the indicator is on) each time

■ Micro dust and pollen filter mode

is pressed.

Operates micro dust and pollen filter mode on/off.

Outside air mode switches to recirculated air mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.

Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 3 minutes.

■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.

Press .

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode, press is defogged.

again when the windshield



429

■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press .

The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.

■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.

Press the switch to turn the system on/off.

The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after a period of time.

6


430


Air outlets

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume changes according to the selected air flow mode.

■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

 Front center outlets

1

2

3

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knobs to open or close the vents.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent for rear seat occupants.



 Front side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

431

1

2

Open the vent.

Close the vent.

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:

● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity

● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:

● Adjust the fan speed

● Adjust the temperature setting

● Turn off Eco drive mode ( →

P. 206)

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is pressed.

■

Fogging up of the windows

● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

● If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

6


432


■ Outside/recirculated air mode

● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75 ° F (24 ° C) and the air conditioning system is on

● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.

● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the power switch is in ON mode.

● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing .

■ Micro dust and pollen filter

● In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur:

• Outside air mode does not switch to recirculated air mode.

• The dehumidification function operates.

• The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute.

●

In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .

● In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up.

● The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.

■ When the outside temperature is low

The dehumidification function may not operate even when the pressed.

is

■

Ventilation and air conditioning odors

● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.



■ Air conditioning filter

→ P. 516


Settings (e.g. outside/recirculated air mode) can be changed.


P. 639)

433

WARNING

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

● Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

● Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets.

Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging.

■ To prevent burns

● Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers: Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on.

● Vehicles with windshield wiper de-icer: Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.

NOTICE


Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

6


434


Heated steering wheel

∗

/seat heaters

∗

Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering wheel and seats, respectively.

WARNING

● Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel and seats when the heater is on:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

● Observe the following precautions to prevent minor burns or overheating:

• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.

• Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

NOTICE

● Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

● To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the functions when the hybrid system is not operating.

∗

: If equipped



Heated steering wheel

Turns the heated steering wheel on/off

The indicator light comes on when the heated steering wheel is operating.

435

The heated steering wheel can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.

Seat heaters

3

4

1

2

Turns seat heater on

Front left seat (high)

Front left seat (low)

Front right seat (high)

Front right seat (low)

The indicator light comes on when the seat heater is operating.

6

●

The seat heaters can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.

●

When not in use, turn the seat heater off by returning the switch to its level position. The indicator light turns off.


436

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

1

2

3

Interior lights (

→

P. 437)

Interior/personal lights (

→

P. 437)

Instrument panel center illumination


Interior lights

■ Front

1

2

Off

3

Door position

The interior lights come on when a door is opened. They turn off when the doors are closed.

On

■ Rear

1

2

Off

Door position

3

The interior light comes on when a door is opened. It turns off when the doors are closed.

On


437

6

Personal lights

Turns the light on/off


438


● Illuminated entry system: The lights automatically turn on/off according to power switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed.

● If the interior lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light main switch is in the door position, the interior lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

● Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.


→

P. 639)


6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features

439

1

2

3

Auxiliary box

Glove box

Bottle holders

( → P. 442)

( →

P. 440)

( → P. 442)

4

5

6

Console box

Cup holders

Storage boxes

( →

P. 440)

( → P. 441)

( → P. 444)

WARNING

● Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

• Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

• Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

● When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use, keep the lids closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

6


440


Glove box

Pull up the lever to open the glove box.

Console box

1

2

Lift the lid while pulling up the knob to release the lock.

Lower box

Upper box

Vehicles with slide function: When using the console box lid as an armrest, slide the console box lid forward as needed.

Pull the lid forward by holding the front of the lid.



441

WARNING

● Do not adjust the position of the console box while the vehicle is moving.

This may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and may lead to an accident that results in death or serious injury.

● Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the front console box and the center panel or rear seats.

● Be careful not to allow the front console box to hit any passengers while adjusting its position.

● After adjusting the console box, make sure it is securely locked in position.

Cup holders



Front



Rear

Pull the armrest down.

WARNING

Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

6


442


Bottle holders



Front



Rear

WARNING

Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

NOTICE

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Auxiliary box

Press in the lid.

WARNING

Do not store items heavier than 0.44 lb. (200 g).

Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident.



Luggage compartment features

Cargo hooks

Raise the hooks to use.

The cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.

443

WARNING

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions when not in use.

Grocery bag hooks

6

NOTICE

Do not hang any object heavier than 8.8 lb. (4 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.


444


Storage boxes

Open the deck board by pulling up the strap.

Warning reflector etc. can be stowed.

WARNING

Do not drive with any of the deck boards opened. Items may fall out and cause injury.

Luggage cover (if equipped)

■

1

Installing the luggage cover

With the “TOP” marks up, insert the right end of the luggage cover into the recess, then compress the left of the luggage cover and insert it into the recess.

2

Attach the hooks to the rear seat head restraints.

If necessary, move the rear seats to enable the hook engagement.


3 Pull out the luggage cover and hook it onto the anchors.


445

■ Removing the luggage cover

1 Release the cover from the left and right anchors and allow it to retract.

2 Compress the end of the luggage cover and lift the luggage cover up.

6


446


■

1

Stowing the luggage cover (vehicles with the luggage cover holders)

Open the rear deck board and remove the side deck covers.

2

Insert the right end of the luggage cover into the recess, then compress the left end of the luggage cover and insert it into the recess.

WARNING

● When installing/stowing the luggage cover, make sure that the luggage cover is securely installed/stowed. Failure to do so may result in serious injury in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

● Do not place anything on the luggage cover to avoid death or serious injury.

● Do not allow children to climb on the luggage cover. Climbing on the luggage cover could result in damage to the luggage cover, possibly causing death or serious injury to the child.

NOTICE

● Do not put heavy items on the luggage cover.

● Install the cover unit in the correct direction so that the “TOP” mark faces upward.



447

Rear cargo net (If equipped)

The fixed position of the poles can be changed to accommodate the size and type of luggage being stored. Also, the cargo net can be used to prevent luggage from spilling out by installing one of the poles at a lower level.

■ Installation positions

1

2

Slide rail

Upper level fixed positions

3

4

Lower level fixed positions A

Lower level fixed positions

B *

*

: Not usable on the vehicles with full-size spare tire.

6


448


■ Installing to the upper level and changing the fixed position

●

Installing the rear cargo net

1 Except for vehicles with full-size spare tire:

Take out the rear cargo net.

2 Push the right or left end of the pole into the slide rail.

3 Push the other end of the pole into the slide rail, and then install both ends into fixed positions.

After installing, check that both ends of the pole are firmly inserted into their fixed positions.

When removing the rear cargo net, follow the installation procedures in reverse order.

●

Changing the fixed position of the pole

1 Lift the pole to move up to the slide rail.



2 Slide the pole to the desired fixed position, and push down.

Move the pole so that its left and right ends line up and the pole is straight.

After changing the position, check that both ends of the pole are firmly inserted into their fixed positions.

■ Installing to the lower level and changing the fixed position

●

Installing the rear cargo net

1 Except for vehicles with full-size spare tire:

Take out the rear cargo net.

449

2 Push one end of the pole into a fixed position to shorten the pole.

6

3 Align the other end of the pole with the corresponding fixed position on the other side and release the pole.

After installing, check that both ends of the pole are firmly inserted into their fixed positions.

When removing the rear cargo net, follow the installation procedures in reverse order.


450


●

Changing the fixed position of the pole

1 Push one end of the pole into its fixed position to shorten the pole, and then remove the rear cargo net.

2 Perform the steps 2 and 3 in “Installing the rear cargo net”.

(

→

P. 449)

■ Stowing the rear cargo net (except for vehicles with full-size spare tire)

1 Open the rear deck board and remove the side deck covers.

2 While pushing the ends of both poles on one side of the cargo net into the storage area to shorten the poles, fix the poles into the storage area.



451

WARNING

Make sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to observe these precautions may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not allow children to climb or ride on the rear cargo net.

● Do not load any luggage into the rear cargo net that extends beyond the height of the pole.

● When installing the rear cargo net to the vehicle, check that both ends of the pole are securely inserted into their fixed positions.

● When stowing the rear cargo net, securely fix it into the storage area.

NOTICE

● Do not place luggage weighing approximately 22.1 lb. (10 kg) or more onto the rear cargo net.

● Install the pole to matching fixed positions on the left and right sides so that the pole is straight. If the pole is installed at an angle, the rear cargo net may come loose.

● Do not use the rear cargo net with only one pole installed. The pole may move while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in damage to the rear cargo net pole or other equipment in the luggage compartment.

6


452


2

Deck board (vehicles without full-size spare tire)

1

When loading long luggage, the deck board can be laid flat over the space between the deck board and separator.

Folding down the rear seatbacks. (

→ P. 147)

Lift the nearest side of the deck board up and pull the deck board forward.

3

Lift the opposite side of the deck board up and return the nearest side to its original position.

Separator

4

Lay the opposite side of the deck board over the edge of the separator.

WARNING

Take extra care to prevent your fingers, etc., from being caught while performing these procedures.


6-4. Using the other interior features

Other interior features

1

Sun visors

Forward position:

Flip down.

2

Side position:

Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.

3

Side extender:

Place in side position then slide backwards.

Vanity mirrors

Slide the cover to open.

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

453

NOTICE

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid system is off.

6


454


Power outlets

Please use a power supply for electronic goods that use less than

12 VDC/10 A (power consumption of 120 W).

When using electronic goods, make sure that the power consumption of all the connected power outlets is less than 120 W.

Open the lid.



Front



Rear

The power outlets can be used when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or

ON mode.

NOTICE

● To avoid damaging the power outlets, close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.

● To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.


Armrest

Fold down the armrest for use.


455

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest, do not apply too much load on the armrest.

Coat hooks

The coat hooks are provided with the rear assist grips.

6

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the

SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.


456


Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

WARNING

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.

Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself by falling over.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.



Garage door opener

∗

457

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

1

2

Programming the HomeLink ®

The HomeLink

®

wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device.

HomeLink

®

indicator light

3

Garage door operation indicators

HomeLink

®

icon

Illuminates while HomeLink

®

is operating.

4 Buttons

■ Before programming HomeLink

®

●

During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm.

● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for more accurate programming.

● Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the

“Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor.

6

∗

: If equipped


458


■ Programming HomeLink

®

1 Press and release the HomeLink

®

button you want to program and check that the HomeLink

®

indicator light flashes (orange).

Perform 3 within 60 seconds of 1 , or the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be completed.

2 Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.

(25 to 75 mm) from the

HomeLink

®

buttons.

Keep the HomeLink

®

indicator light in view while programming.

3

 For U.S.A. owners

Press and hold the handheld transmitter button until the

HomeLink

®

indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then release the button.

3

 Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market

4

Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink

®

indicator light changes from slowly flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing (green)

(rolling code) or continuously lit (green) (fixed code).

Test the HomeLink

®

operation by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the indicator light:

●

Device with fixed code: If the indicator light is solid/continuous, programming has been completed and your garage door or other device should operate when the HomeLink

®

button is pressed and released.



459

●

Device with rolling code: If the indicator light flashes rapidly, your garage door opener motor (or other device) is equipped with a rolling code. Complete the programming process by firmly pressing and holding the programmed HomeLink

®

button for 2 seconds and then release the button.

●

If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to “Programming a rolling code system”.

5 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink

®

buttons.

■ Programming a rolling code system

1

2

Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor in the garage.

This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details.

Press and release the

“Learn” or “Smart” button.

Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2 .

6


460


3 Press and hold the desired

HomeLink

®

button (inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/ release) up to 3 times to complete programming.

If the garage door opener motor operates when the HomeLink

® button is pressed, the garage door opener motor recognizes the HomeLink

®

signal.

■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for compatible devices)

When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle.

2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)

1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to

HomeLink

®

, both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.

2

If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10 presses of the HomeLink

®

button after programming has been completed.

Press a programmed HomeLink

®

button to operate a garage door.

3 Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink

®

button, after the garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.



461

■ Reprogramming a single HomeLink

®

button

1

2

When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten:

With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink

®

button.

When the HomeLink

®

indicator starts flashing (orange), continue to hold the HomeLink

®

button and perform “Programming Home-

Link

®

” 1 (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink

®

indicator to start flashing).

Operating HomeLink

®

Press the appropriate HomeLink

®

button. The HomeLink

®

indicator light should turn on.

Garage door operation indicators

1

2

The status of the opening and closing of a garage door is shown by the indicators.

Opening

Closing

This function is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)

Color

Orange (flashing)

Green

Red (flashing)

Status

Currently opening/closing

Opening/closing has completed

Feedback signals cannot be received

The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door may not be received.

To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either

HomeLink

®

buttons and or and simultaneously.

The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.

6


462


Erasing the entire HomeLink ® memory (all three codes)

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the

HomeLink

®

indicator light changes from continuously lit

(orange) to rapidly flashing

(green).

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink

®

memory.

■

Codes stored in the HomeLink

®

memory

● The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is disconnected.

●

If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink

®

button that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.

■

Before programming

● Install a new battery in the transmitter.

● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the Home-

Link



.

■

Certification for the garage door opener


NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING: changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.


NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE:

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.



■ When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

463

WARNING

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink ® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

■ When operating or programming HomeLink ®

Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink ® buttons.

6


464


Compass

∗

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

Operation

To turn the compass on or off, press and hold the switch for 3 seconds.

Displays and directions

Display

N

NE

E

SE

S

SW

W

NW

Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

∗

: If equipped


Calibrating the compass


465

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.

To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.

■ Deviation calibration

1 Stop the vehicle.

2 Press and hold the switch for

6 seconds.

A number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display.

6

3 Press the switch and, referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.

If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.


466


■ Circling calibration

1 Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.

2 Press and hold the switch for

9 seconds.

“C” appears on the compass display.

3 Drive the vehicle at 5 mph

(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

● The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

● The vehicle has become magnetized.

(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

● The battery has been disconnected.

● A door is open.



467

WARNING

■ While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

■ When doing the circling calibration

Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE

■ To avoid compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.

Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.

■ To ensure normal operation of the compass

● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof [if equipped], power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

6


468



469


7

7-1. Maintenance and care


the vehicle exterior.......... 470


the vehicle interior........... 473

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements ................... 476

General maintenance........ 479

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)

programs......................... 482

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions ..................... 483

Hood ................................. 485

Positioning a floor jack ...... 487

Engine compartment......... 488

12-volt battery ................... 496

Tires .................................. 501

Tire inflation pressure ....... 510

Wheels .............................. 513

Air conditioning filter.......... 516

Electronic key battery........ 518

Checking and replacing

fuses ............................... 520

Light bulbs......................... 523


470

7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

●

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

●

Wipe away any water.

● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

●

Before washing the vehicle:

• Fold the mirrors

• Turn off the power back door (if equipped)

Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.

●

Rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle.

■ High pressure car washes

●

Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.

● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

■

When using a car wash

● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

●

If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.



471

■ Aluminum wheels

● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.

Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather.

● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

■ Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

WARNING

■ When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.

■ When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to off.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades.

OFF

● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand

● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor

● If something bumps against the windshield

● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

■ Precautions regarding the Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer.

7


472


NOTICE

■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface

• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to off position. If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.

■ When using a high-pressure car wash

● When washing the vehicle, do not let water from the high-pressure washer directly hit the camera (if equipped) or the area around the camera. Due to the shock from high-pressure water, it is possible that the device may not operate normally.

● Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water.

• Traction related parts

• Steering parts

• Suspension parts

• Brake parts



473

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

●

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

●

If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

●

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Cleaning the leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

●

Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

●

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

●

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

●

Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

7


474


■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water.

Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

WARNING

■ Water in the vehicle

● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vents, and in the luggage compartment.

Doing so may cause the hybrid battery (traction battery), electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(

→ P. 40)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.



475

NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach

• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with Toyota

Safety Sense P)

Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

(

→ P. 235)

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window

● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

7


476

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.


7-2. Maintenance

477

■

Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

■

Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the message.

To reset the message, follow the procedure described below:

1 Press or of the meter control switch and select information display.

on the multi-

2 Press or of the meter control switch and select “Vehicle Settings”.

and then press .

3 Press or of the meter control switch and select “Scheduled Maintenance”. and then press .

4 Select the “Yes” and press .

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

●

Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

●

Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

7


478

7-2. Maintenance

WARNING

■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■ Handling of the 12-volt battery

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. ( →

P. 496)


7-2. Maintenance

479

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items

Brake fluid

Engine/power control unit coolant

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Radiator/condenser

Washer fluid

Check points

Is the brake fluid at the correct level?

(

→

P. 494)

Is the engine/power control unit coolant at the correct level?

(

→

P. 492)

Is the engine oil at the correct level?

(

→ P. 489)

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects.

(

→

P. 493)

Is there sufficient washer fluid?

( → P. 495)

Luggage compartment

Items

12-volt battery

Check points

Check the connections.

(

→ P. 496)

7


480

7-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior

Items Check points

Accelerator pedal

Hybrid transmission

“Park” mechanism

• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly

(without uneven pedal effort or catching).

• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Brake pedal

Brakes

• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?

• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor? (

→ P. 612)

• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play? (

→ P. 612)

• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.

• The brakes should work effectively.

• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.

• The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.

Head restraints

Indicators/buzzers

• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?

• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

Lights

Parking brake

Seat belts

Seats

Steering wheel

• Do all the lights come on?

• Does the parking brake lever move smoothly?

• When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?

• The seat belts should not be damaged.

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?

• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?

• There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.


7-2. Maintenance

481

Vehicle exterior

Doors

Items

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Tires

Windshield wipers/rear window wiper

Check points

• Do the doors operate smoothly?

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?

• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.

• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

• The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.

• The wiper blades should clear the windshield/ rear window without streaking or skipping.

WARNING

■ If the hybrid system is operating

Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

7


482

7-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

●

When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.


7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

483

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Items

12-volt battery condition

( →

P. 496)

Parts and tools

• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level

( → P. 494)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

Engine/power control unit coolant level

( →

P. 492)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology

For the U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with

50% coolant and 50% deionized water.

For Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with

55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

Engine oil level

( →

P. 489)

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses (

→ P. 520)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original

Light bulbs

( →

P. 523)

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Flathead screwdriver • Wrench

Radiator and condenser (

→ P. 493)

Tire inflation pressure (

→

P. 510)

• Tire pressure gauge

⎯

• Compressed air source

Washer fluid

( → P. 495)

• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

7


484


WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■ When working on the engine compartment

● Make sure that the “POWER ON” on the multi-information display and the

“READY” indicator are both off.

● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

● Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable.

■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the power switch is off. With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. ( → P. 493)

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.



485

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

1 Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2 Push the auxiliary catch lever to the left and lift the hood.

3 Hold the hood open by inserting the supporting rod into the slot.

7


486


WARNING

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

■ After installing the support rod into the slot

Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your head or body.

NOTICE

■ When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.



Positioning a floor jack

487

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely.

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

◆

Front

◆

Rear

7


488


Engine compartment

1

2

3

4

5

Fuse box ( →

P. 520)

Engine coolant reservoir

( →

P. 492)

Engine oil filler cap (

→

P. 490)

Power control unit coolant reservoir (

→

P. 492)

Brake fluid reservoir

(

→

P. 494)

■ 12-volt battery

→ P. 496

8

9

6

7

10

Radiator ( → P. 493)

Condenser (

→

P. 493)

Electric cooling fans

Engine oil level dipstick

(

→

P. 489)

Washer fluid tank ( → P. 495)



489

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

3

4

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Flat dipstick: Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Non-flat dipstick: Reinsert the non-flat dipstick fully with its protruding areas ( 1 in the illustration) pointing towards the engine.

7


490


5

1

2

3

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

Low

Normal

Excessive

 Flat dipstick  Non-flat dipstick

Measuring side

6

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection

Oil quantity (Low

→

Full)

Items

→ P. 609

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Clean funnel

1

2

3

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.



491

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine

● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

WARNING

■ Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.

Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

7


492


Coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.

■ Engine coolant reservoir

1

2

3

Reservoir cap

“FULL” line

“LOW” line

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. (

→ P. 597)

■ Power control unit coolant reservoir

1

2

3

Reservoir cap

“FULL” line

“LOW” line

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. (

→ P. 597)

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31

°

F [-35

°

C])

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44

°

F [-42

°

C])

For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

■

If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir cap, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.



493

WARNING

■ When the hybrid system is hot

Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

■ When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■ When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

■ When the electric cooling fans are operating

Do not touch the engine compartment.

With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. Be sure the power switch is off when working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille.

7


494


Brake fluid

■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type

Items

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

WARNING

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.


Washer fluid

If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.


495

WARNING

■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

7


496


12-volt battery

Location

The 12-volt battery is located in the left-hand side of luggage compartment.

1

Removing the 12-volt battery cover

Vehicles with full-size spare tire: Turn the knob of each clip on the rear deck board to unlock.

2

 When inspecting the battery terminals

Remove the rear deck board.


3 Remove the upper cover with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.


497

2

 When inspecting or replacing the 12-volt battery

Remove the rear deck board and left side deck cover.

3 Remove the cover.

Exterior

1

2

Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

7


498


■

Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:

● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

●

Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery

The hybrid system may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.

1

2


Open and close any of the doors.

3 Restart the hybrid system.

● Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

● Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid system may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt.

● The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power switch before disconnecting the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the power switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the hybrid system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your

Toyota dealer.



499

WARNING

■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery:

● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.

● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.

■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery

Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

7


500


WARNING

■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

■ When replacing the 12-volt battery

Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.

For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ When disconnecting the 12-volt battery

Do not disconnect the negative (-) terminal on the body side. The disconnected negative (-) terminal may touch the positive (+) terminal, which may cause a short and result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the 12-volt battery

Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating.

Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.



501

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread. Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

1

2

3

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “

Δ

” marks, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

7


502


Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

 Vehicles with compact spare tire

 Vehicles with full-size spare tire

Front Front

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.

If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a warning light. (

→ P. 549)

◆

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (

→ P. 504)



◆

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

503

When the tire size is changed, the tire pressure warning system must be initialized.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the power switch off.

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.

2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (

→

P. 613)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

3

4


Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

7

5 Wait for a few minutes with the power switch in ON mode and then turn the power switch off.


504


◆

Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Toyota dealer.

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

■ Replacing tires and wheels (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.



505

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification

Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (

→

P. 618)

■ Tire types

● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

● All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

● Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (

→ P. 317)

■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

7


506


■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly (if equipped)

● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.

• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.

• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.

• Tire chains etc. are equipped.

• Lock nuts are equipped.

• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.

• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.

• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.

• If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.

*

• If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the luggage compartment.

*

* : Vehicles with full-size spare tire only

● Performance may be affected in the following situations.

• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended.

● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function.



507

■ The initialization operation (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.

● If you have accidentally turned the power switch off during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the power switch has been turned to ON mode for the next time.

● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.

■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed (if equipped)

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.

● After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has been completed, the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute.

■ Tire pressure warning system certification


FCC ID: PAXPMVC010

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING


7


508


WARNING

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).

● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

● Vehicles with compact spare tire: Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system (if equipped)

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.



509

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound.

● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire. (

→ P. 502)

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

7


510


Tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (

→

P. 613)



1

2

Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

511

3

4

1

2

5

6

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel economy

● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling

● Reduced tire life due to wear

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

7


512


■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.

● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

WARNING

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

● Air leaking from between tire and wheel

● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage

● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.



513

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset * .

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

*

: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using the following:

●

Wheels of different sizes or types

● Used wheels

●

Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions

●

Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

●

When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

●

Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

●

Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

7


514


■ When replacing wheels (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.

Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. ( →

P. 502)

WARNING

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■ When installing the wheel nuts

● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward.

Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Tapered portion

ITI41P007

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

■ Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.

Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident.



515

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your

Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your

Toyota dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

7


516


Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

1

2

Removal method


Open the glove box. Slide off the damper.

3 Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the claws.

4 Remove the filter cover.


5

Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The “ ↑ UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.


517

■ Changing interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■ When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

7


518


Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:

●

Flathead screwdriver

●

Small flathead screwdriver

●

Lithium battery CR2032

1

Replacing the battery

Take out the mechanical key.

2 Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

3 Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.



519

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

■ If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.

● The operational range will be reduced.

WARNING

■ Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.

Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

7


520


Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

1

2


Open the fuse box cover or instrument panel.

 Engine compartment type A  Engine compartment type B

Push the tabs in and lift the cover off.

 Under the instrument panel

Push the tabs in and lift the cover off.

 Behind the instrument panel

Remove the cover.

Remove the instrument panel.


3 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool.


521

4

1

2

Check if the fuse is blown.

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Type A and B:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type C and D:

Contact your Toyota dealer.

 Type A  Type B

7

 Type C  Type D


522


■ After a fuse is replaced

● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. ( →

P. 523)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

WARNING

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire


Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

■ Fuse box near the power control unit

Never check or replace the fuses as there are high voltage parts and wiring near the fuse box.

Doing so may cause electric shock, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.



523

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your

Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (

→

P. 614)

Bulb locations

■ Front

1

2

3

4

Front side marker light

Fog light

Headlight/daytime running lights (halogen headlights)

Front turn signal light/parking light (halogen headlights) or front turn signal light (LED headlights)

7


524

■ Rear


1

2

3

Tail light (bulb type)

Back-up light

Rear turn signal light

4

5

Stop/tail light and rear side marker light (bulb type)

License plate lights

Replacing light bulbs

■ Headlights/daytime running lights (halogen headlights)

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

2 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.


3 Replace the light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert.


525

4 Turn and secure the bulb base.

5 Install the bulb base.

Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the headlights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

7


526


■ Front turn signal lights/parking lights (halogen headlights) or front turn signal lights (LED headlights)


2 Remove the light bulb.

3 When installing, reverse the steps listed.


■ Front side maker lights



527



■ Fog lights

1 To allow enough working space, turn the steering wheel to the opposite side of the bulb to be replaced.

2 Remove the screws from the fender liner.

7


528


3 Remove the fender liner clip and open the fender liner.

4 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.


6 Set the new light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert.

Turn it clockwise to set.


7 Set the connector.

After installing the connector, shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the fog lights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.


529

8 Reinstall the fender liner and install the clip.

Insert the clip and turn to lock.

9 Reinstall the fender liner and install the screws.

Make sure that the fender liner is attached to the inside of the bumper.

7


530


■ Stop/tail lights, rear side marker lights (bulb type) and rear turn signal lights

1 Open the back door and remove the bolts, and remove the lamp assembly by pulling it directly backward from the rear of the vehicle.


 Stop/tail lights and rear side marker lights

 Rear turn signal lights


 Stop/tail lights and rear side marker lights

 Rear turn signal lights



■ Tail lights (bulb type)

1 Open the back door and remove the cover.

To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with rag.


531



7



532


■ Back-up lights




After installing the bulb base, make sure that the rubber cover is installed securely.

Rubber cover


■ License plate lights

1 Open the back door and remove the cover.

To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with rag.


533


 Left side  Right side



7


534


■ Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

●

Headlights (LED headlights)

● Parking lights/daytime running lights (LED headlights)

●

Side turn signal lights

●

Stop/tail lights (LED type)

●

Tail lights (LED type)

● Rear side marker lights (LED type)

●

High mounted stoplight

■

LED Lights

The headlights (LED headlights), parking lights/daytime running lights (LED headlights), side turn signal lights (if equipped), stop/tail lights (LED type), tail lights (LED type), rear side marker lights (LED type) and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations:

●

Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.

●

Water has built up inside the headlight.



535

WARNING

■ Replacing light bulbs

● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.

Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

● Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric circuits or component parts.

Doing so may result in death or serious injury due to electric shock.

● When replacing the back up light of the right side, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipes until they have cooled down sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

■ To prevent damage or fire

● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

7


536



537


8

8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers .......... 538

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ...................... 539

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs

to be towed ..................... 540

If you think

something is wrong ......... 546

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer

sounds ............................ 547


displayed......................... 556

If you have a flat tire.......... 576

If the hybrid system

will not start ..................... 588


not operate properly........ 590


is discharged................... 592

If your vehicle overheats ... 597


stuck ............................... 602


538

8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signals will flash.

To turn them off, press the switch once again.

■ Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge.


8-1. Essential information

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

539

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

1

2

3

4

3

4





Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Stop the hybrid system.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

To stop the hybrid system, press and hold the power switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly

3 times or more in succession.

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more

5

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

WARNING

■ If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system.

8


540

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/ provincial and local laws.

If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a towing dolly. (

→

P. 541, 544)

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.

●

The hybrid system warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the vehicle does not move.

●

The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.



Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

 From the front  From the rear

541

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

Using a flatbed truck

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45 ° .

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

8


542


Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for at most short distance at under 18 mph (30 km/h).

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

1

2

Emergency towing procedure

Take out the towing eyelet.

Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration.

3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.



4 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench or hard metal bar.

543

5

6

7

Securely attach cables and chains to the towing eyelet.

Take care not to damage the vehicle body.

Enter the vehicle being towed and start the hybrid system.

If the hybrid system does not start, turn the power switch to ON mode.

Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.

When the shift lever cannot be shifted:

→

P. 209

■

While towing

If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

■

Wheel nut wrench

Wheel nut wrench is installed in the tool bag. ( →

P. 577)

8


544


WARNING



■ When towing the vehicle

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain or related parts may be damaged, the vehicle may fly off the truck, or electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction.

■ While towing

● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.

● Do not turn the power switch off.

There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.

■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.



545

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the power switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing

Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.

■ Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc.)

Never dinghy tow your vehicle to prevent causing serious damage to the hybrid transmission and AWD system.

( → P. 197)

8


546


If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

●

Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

●

Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

●

Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal

Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound

●

Excessive tire squeal when cornering

● Strange noises related to the suspension system

●

Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system

Operational symptoms

●

Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly

●

Appreciable loss of power

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

●

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor



If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

547

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Warning light and warning buzzer list

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Red)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details/Actions

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer) * 1

Indicates that:

• The brake fluid level is low; or

• The brake system is malfunctioning

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.

→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

(Yellow)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The regenerative braking system; or

• The electronically controlled brake system

→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Malfunction indicator lamp


• The hybrid system;

• The electronic throttle control system;

• The electronic hybrid transmission control system


SRS warning light


• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system

→

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

8


548


Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details/Actions

ABS warning light


• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system


Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system


PCS warning light (if equipped)

When the warning light flashes (and a buzzer sounds):

Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System)

→

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

When the warning light flashes (and a buzzer does not sound):

Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to either of the following:

• An area around the radar sensor or camera sensor being dirty or covered with condensation, ice, stickers, etc.

→ Clear the dirt, condensation, ice, stickers, etc.

(

→ P. 235)

• Radar sensor or camera sensor operational conditions

(such as temperature etc.) being not met

→ Driving is possible in this case. The PCS (Pre-Collision System) will be enabled if the operational conditions (such as temperature etc.) are met again.

When the warning light is illuminated:

Either the VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system or PCS

(Pre-Collision System) is disabled or both are disabled.

→ To enable the PCS, enable both the VSC system and

PCS. (

→

P. 245, 310)



549

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

Slip indicator


• The VSC system;

• Trailer sway control system;

• The TRAC system; or

• The hill-start assist control system

The light will flash when the TRAC, VSC, ABS or Trailer

Sway Control system is operating.


(On the center panel)

Low fuel level warning light

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.2 gal.

(8.4 L, 1.8 Imp. gal.) or less

→

Refuel the vehicle.

Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)

* 2

Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts

→ Fasten the seat belt.

If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.

Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)

* 2

Warn the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts

→

Fasten the seat belt.

Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

→

P. 556

Tire pressure warning light (if equipped)

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure such as

• Natural causes ( →

P. 551)

• Flat tire (

→

P. 576)

→ Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.

The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your

Toyota dealer.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system

→ Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

8


550


Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

(Amber)

LDA warning light (if equipped)

The warning light comes on and a warning message is displayed to indicate that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system is not available temporarily or has detected a malfunction.

→

P. 557

* 1

: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or more.

* 2

: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:

The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph

(20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after

24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.

Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:

The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.

Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:

The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passengers that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 6 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph

(20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 24 more seconds.

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, driver’s seat belt pretensioner, front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner and force limiter, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. ( →

P. 40)



551

■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

(vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

■ When a tire is replaced with a compact spare tire (vehicles with compact spare tire and the tire pressure warning system)

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.

Replace the spare tire with the standard tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.

8


552


■ If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used

● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer

● If the tire inflation pressure is 70 psi (480 kPa, 4.9 kgf/cm

2

or bar) or higher

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby

● If a radio set at a similar frequency is in use in the vehicle

● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed

● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings

● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

● If tire chains are used

● If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.

*

● If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the luggage compartment.

*

*

: Vehicles with full-size spare tire only

■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the power switch is turned to ON mode, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■

Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.


The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.


P. 639)



553

WARNING

■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the

ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.

If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.

If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

8


554


WARNING

■ Maintenance of the tires (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.



555

NOTICE

■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

(vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

8


556


If a warning message is displayed

If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:

1

2

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multiinformation display.


If any of the warning messages are shown again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.



557

Warning message and warning buzzer list

Warning message Details/Actions

Indicates that:

• There is a high possibility of a frontal collision; or

• The pre-collision braking function is operating

A buzzer also sounds.

→ Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

(If equipped)

Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)


→

Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

(If equipped)

Indicates that the vehicle has deviated from the lane (while the LDA [Lane Departure Alert with steering control] system is operating)

The lane line on the side the vehicle has deviated from flashes in amber.


→ Check around the vehicle and back to inside of the lane lines.

(Amber)

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

(U.S.A.)

(Red)

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in the brake system



Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

8


558



Indicates that the driver’s door was opened with the shift position in any position other than P


→

Shift the shift position to P.

(Flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system


→

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Indicates that one or more of the doors or the back door is not fully closed

The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed.

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h),

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.

→ Make sure that all the doors are closed.

Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist

All the sensor lights flash.


→

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

(If equipped)


Warning message


Details/Actions

559

Indicates that an intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice

All the sensor lights flash.


→

Clean the sensor.

(If equipped)

Indicates that the accelerator pedal is depressed while the shift position is in N


→ Release the accelerator pedal and shift the shift position to D, S or R.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the accelerator pedal is depressed while the shift lever is in N


→

Release the accelerator pedal and shift the shift position to D, S or R.

8

(Flashes)


560



Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) power has dropped because a long period of time has elapsed after shifting the shift lever to N


→

Restart the hybrid system when starting the vehicle.

(Flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system

Depending on the malfunction, troubleshooting methods may also be displayed.


→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low


→ When stopping the vehicle for a long period of time, shift the shift lever to P. The battery cannot be charged with the shift lever in N.


Warning message


Details/Actions

561

(Flashes) (U.S.A.)

(Red)

(Canada)

Indicates that the vehicle is being driven at 3 mph

(5 km/h) or more with the parking brake still engaged.


→

Release the parking brake.

Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system has determined that the driver does not have the hands on the steering wheel while the steering control function is on

If the system continues to determine that the driver does not have the hands on the steering wheel, a buzzer also sounds.

→ Firmly hold the steering wheel.

(If equipped)


• The SRS airbag system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system


→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.


• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system


→

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

8

(U.S.A.) (Canada)


562



Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high


→

P. 597

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

→

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

Indicates that the radar sensor is dirty or covered with ice


→ Clean the sensor.

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the dynamic radar cruise control system cannot be used temporarily due to bad weather


→

Use the radar cruise control system when it becomes available again.


Warning message


Details/Actions

563

Indicates a malfunction in the smart key system



(If equipped)

Indicates that a Blind Spot Monitor sensor or the surrounding area on the bumper is dirty or covered with ice


→ Clean the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper.

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system (if equipped) or dynamic radar cruise control system (if equipped)

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.



Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system



8

(Amber)

(If equipped)


564


Warning message

(Amber) (Flashes)

(If equipped)

(Amber) (Flashes)

(If equipped)

(Amber)

(If equipped)

Details/Actions

The operation conditions of the camera sensor

(temperature, etc.) are not met.

→ When the operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are met, the following systems will become available.

• PCS (Pre-Collision System)

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system

• Dynamic radar cruise control

• Automatic High Beam

Indicates that dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., are present on the windshield in front of the camera sensor

The following systems will be temporarily unusable.

• PCS (Pre-Collision System)

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system

• Dynamic radar cruise control

• Automatic High Beam

→ Turn the system off, remove any dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., from the windshield, and then turn the system back on.

The LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system is temporarily canceled due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the camera sensor.


→ Turn the LDA system off and follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedures for warning message. Afterward, drive the vehicle for a short time, and then turn the

LDA system back on.

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system



(Flashes)

(If equipped)


Warning message


Details/Actions

565

Indicates a malfunction in the BSM (Blind Spot

Monitor) system



(If equipped)

Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure


→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Indicates a malfunction in the AWD system (E-

Four)

The AWD system turns off and the vehicle switches to front wheel drive.



8

(U.S.A.)

(Yellow)

(Canada)


• The regenerative brake system; or

• The electronically controlled brake system


→

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.


566



Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system cannot be used as the vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or less

→

Drive the vehicle at approximately 32 mph

(50 km/h) or more.

(If equipped)

Indicates that LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) cannot be used due to the vehicle speed being too high

→ Slow down.

(If equipped)

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on


→

Turn the lights off.

Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed

(with the power switch off, and the driver’s door open)


→ Close the moon roof.

Indicates that the hybrid system has overheated

This message may be displayed when driving under severe operating conditions. (For example, when driving up a long steep hill.)


→ Stop and check. (

→ P. 597)


Warning message

(If equipped)


567

Details/Actions


• The automatic headlight leveling system;

• The Automatic High Beam system (if equipped); or

• The LED headlight system (if equipped)



Indicates that maintenance of the hybrid battery

(traction battery) cooling component is required

The filter may be clogged, the air intake vents may be blocked or there may be a gap in the duct.

→ Have maintenance performed on the hybrid battery (traction battery) cooling component at your Toyota dealer.

Indicates that the insufficient 12-volt battery charge

→ After a few seconds

* 1

the message disappears: Maintain the hybrid system operation state for approximately 15 minutes or more to recharge the 12-volt battery.

→ If the message does not disappear: Start the hybrid system by following the “If the

12-volt battery is discharged” procedure.

(

→

P. 592)

Indicates that the washer fluid level is low

→ Add washer fluid.

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.2

gal. (8.4 L, 1.8 Imp.gal.) or less

→ Refuel the vehicle.

8

Indicates that the outside temperature is approximately 37

°

F (3

°

C) or lower

A buzzer also sounds

→ Drive carefully, as the road may be icy.


568


Warning message

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

Details/Actions

Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule

* 2 should be performed soon.

Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the message has been reset.

→ If necessary, perform maintenance.

Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule

* 2

.

Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the message has been reset. (The message will not display properly unless the message has been reset.)

→

Perform the necessary maintenance.

Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (

→

P. 477)

Indicates that, since the VSC (Vehicle Stability

Control) system was turned off, the pre-collision brake system operation is stopped

→ Turn the VSC on. ( →

P. 310)

(If equipped)

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the pre-collision system is temporarily unavailable

→ Please wait until the system returns.

If the warning message does not disappear, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Indicates that part of the PCS (Pre-Collision System) sensor is dirty, covered with ice, etc.


→ Remove any dirt, ice, etc.

(Flashes)

(If equipped)


Warning message


569

Details/Actions

Air conditioning, heater and other operations are temporarily limited due to high power consumption

→ Turn off unnecessary electronic equipment to reduce power consumption.

Please wait until the power supply returns to normal.

If this item is frequently displayed, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer immediately.

Indicates that the EV drive mode is not available * 3

The reason the EV drive mode is not available

(the vehicle is idling, battery charge is low, speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed.


→ Use the EV drive mode when it becomes available.

8


570



Indicates that the EV drive mode has been automatically canceled * 3

The reason the EV drive mode is not available

(the battery charge is low, speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed.


→ Drive the vehicle for a while.

(Flashes)

* 1

: Displays for about 6 seconds

* 2

: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

* 3

: For the EV drive mode operating conditions ( →

P. 203).



Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer


Once

Once

⎯

3 times

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

571

The electronic key is not detected when an attempt is made to start the hybrid system.

→ Start the hybrid system with the electronic key present.

The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and a door other than the driver’s door was opened and closed while the power switch was in a mode other than off.

→ Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

The driver’s door was opened and closed while the electronic key was not in the vehicle, the shift lever was in P and the power switch was not turned off.

→ Turn the power switch off or bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

Once

Continuous

(5 seconds)

(Displayed alternately)

An attempt was made to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the power switch off when the shift lever was in P.

→ Turn the power switch off and lock the doors again.

8

(Flashes)


572


Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message

9 times

⎯

Details/Actions

An attempt was made to drive when the regular key was not inside the vehicle.

→

Confirm that the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

(Flashes)

Continuous

⎯

The driver’s door was opened when the shift lever was not in

P and the power switch was not turned off.

→

Shift the shift lever to P.

(Flashes)

Continuous

Continuous

Once

Continuous

(5 seconds)

(Displayed alternately)

The driver’s door was opened and closed while the electronic key was not in the vehicle, the shift lever was not in P and the power switch was not turned off.

→

Shift the shift lever to P.

→ Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to lock the doors using the Smart key system while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle.

→ Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.



573

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Once

Continuous

(5 seconds)

Once

Once

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

Warning message

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

Details/Actions

An attempt was made to lock either front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock button into the lock position, then closing the door with the electronic key still inside the vehicle.

→ Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.

• When the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key and then the power switch was pressed, the electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle.

• The electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the power switch was pressed two consecutive times.

→ Touch the electronic key to the power switch while depressing the brake pedal.

An attempt was made to start the hybrid system with the shift lever in an incorrect position.

→ Shift the shift lever to P and start the hybrid system.

Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function.

→

Next time when starting the hybrid system, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the

12-volt battery.

8


574


Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message

Once

Once

Once

⎯

⎯

⎯

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

Details/Actions

The electronic key has a low battery.

→ Replace the electronic key battery. (

→

P. 518)

The driver’s door was opened and closed with the power switch turned off and then the power switch was put in

ACCESSORY mode twice without the hybrid system being started.

→ Press the power switch while depressing the brake pedal.

During a hybrid system starting procedure in the event that the electronic key was not functioning properly (

→

P. 591), the

power switch was touched with the electronic key.

→ Press the power switch within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding.

The steering lock could not be released within 3 seconds of the power switch being pressed.

→

Press the power switch while depressing the brake pedal and moving the steering wheel left and right.

Once

⎯

The power switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P or N.

→ Shift the shift lever to P.

(Flashes)



575

Interior buzzer

Once

Exterior buzzer

⎯

Warning message

(Flashes)

Details/Actions

After the power switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P, the shift lever has been shifted to P.

→

Turn the power switch off.

■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

8


576


If you have a flat tire

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire.

For details about tires:

→ P. 501

WARNING

■ If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

● Set the parking brake.

● Shift the shift lever to P.

● Stop the hybrid system.

● Turn on the emergency flashers. ( →

P. 538)

● For vehicles with power back door: Turn off the power back door system. ( →

P. 123)



Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

577

1

2

Tool bag

Jack

3 Spare tire

8


578


WARNING

■ Using the tire jack


Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Put the jack properly in its jack point.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.

● Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

● Stop the vehicle on firm, flat and level ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.

● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.



1

Taking out the jack

Vehicles with full-size spare tire: Turn the knob of each clip on the rear deck board to unlock.

579

2 Remove the rear deck board.

3 Take out the jack.

Unclasp the hook and remove the jack.

When stowing the jack, wind back the jack until it does not move, fix it with the rubber band and then stow it.

8


580


Taking out the spare tire

Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

WARNING

■ When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

1

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Front

Rear

Flat tire

Left-hand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire



2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

581

3 Turn the tire jack portion A by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

4 Assemble the jack handle and the wheel nut wrench as shown in the illustration.

5 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

8


582

6


Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

WARNING

■ Replacing a flat tire

● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103

N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. ( → P. 514)

● For vehicles with power back door: In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door system ( →

P. 123).

Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.



583

1

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

2

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

When replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel seat

When replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel, turn the wheel nuts until the washers come into contact with the disc wheel.

Disc wheel

Washer

8


584


3 Lower the vehicle.

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.



585

■ The compact spare tire (if equipped)

● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.

( →

P. 613)

■ When using the compact spare tire (if equipped)

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

■ When the compact spare tire is equipped (if equipped)

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires.

■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with compact spare tire)

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.

Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:

1

2

Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.

3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.

■ The band used to secure the jack

After detaching the hook on the jack securing band from lock hole 1 , twist the band and attach the hook to lock

8


586


WARNING

■ When using the compact spare tire (if equipped)

● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.

● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

■ When the compact spare tire is attached (if equipped)

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

• ABS & Brake assist

• VSC

• TRAC

• Cruise control (if equipped)

• Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)

• EPS

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (if equipped)

• PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)

• Rear view monitor system (if equipped)

• Toyota parking assist monitor (if equipped)

• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)

• Panoramic view monitor (if equipped)

• Entune Premium Audio with

Navigation (if equipped)

Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components:

• E-Four (Electric Four wheel drive system)

■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire (if equipped)

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.



587

WARNING

■ When stowing the flat tire (vehicles with compact spare tire)

● Make sure the rear seatbacks are in their original position.

● Secure it using a tire tie-down belt. Otherwise, the flat tire may fly out in case of sudden braking or an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle (if equipped)

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire (if equipped)

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■ When replacing the tires (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

8


588


If the hybrid system will not start

Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:

The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. (

→

P. 198)

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. ( →

P. 590)

●

There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle. (

→

P. 81)

● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (

→ P. 84)

●

There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

● The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (

→ P. 589)

The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.


● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. ( →

P. 592)

●

The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

(

→

P. 496)



589

The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.


● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. ( →

P. 592)

●

One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected.

(

→

P. 496)

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function

3

4

1

2

When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning normally.

Do not use this starting procedure except in cases of emergency.

Set the parking brake.


Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

8


590


If the electronic key does not operate properly

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (

→

P. 141) or the electronic key cannot be used

because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.

1

2

Locking and unlocking the doors

Use the mechanical key (

→

P. 108)

in order to perform the following operations:

Locks all the doors

Unlocks the door

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver’s door. Turning the key once again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.



591


1

2

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the power switch.

3

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the power switch will turn to ON mode.

When the smart key system is deactivated in customization setting, the power switch will turn to

ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that on the multi-information display.

is displayed

4 Press the power switch.

In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact your

Toyota dealer.

■ Stopping the hybrid system

Shift the shift lever to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.

■ Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.

(

→

P. 518)

■

Changing power switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step 3 above.

The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed.(

→ P. 199)

■ When the electronic key does not work properly

●

Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.


→

P. 636)

●

Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function.

( →

P. 137)

8


592


If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the vehicle’s 12-volt battery is discharged.

You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

1

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.

Open the hood (

→

P. 485) and

fuse box cover.

2 Open the exclusive jump starting terminal cover.



3 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

593

2

1

4 3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump starting terminal on your vehicle.

Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting terminal and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch off.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON mode.

8


594


7

8

Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator light does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.

9 Close the exclusive jump starting terminal cover, and reinstall the fuse box cover to its original position.

When installing, first hook the fuse box cover onto the two rear tabs.

Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■

Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.


●

Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.

●

Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The

12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)

■

When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery

● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart key system when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

● The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.

● The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the

12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off.

If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

●

Some systems may require initialization. (

→

P. 641)



595

WARNING

■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:

● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.

● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt battery.

■ 12-volt battery precautions

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:

● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.

● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.

■ After recharging the 12-volt battery

Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.

■ When replacing the 12-volt battery

→ P. 500

8


596


NOTICE

■ When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans, etc.

■ To prevent damaging the vehicle

The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the 12-volt battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start another vehicle.



If your vehicle overheats

597

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

●

The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (

→

P. 93)

enters the red zone, or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)

● “Engine Coolant Temp high” or “Hybrid System Overheated” is shown on the multi-information display. (

→ P. 562, 566)

●

Steam comes out from under the hood.

Correction procedures

■ If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or “Engine Coolant Temp high” is shown on the multi-information display

1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the hybrid system.

2 If you see steam:

3

Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

1

2

Carefully lift the hood.

After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

Radiator

Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

8


598


4

1

2

3

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and

“LOW” lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir

“FULL” line

“LOW” line

5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

6

7

Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

If the fans are not operating:

Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the fans are operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.



599

■ If “Hybrid System Overheated” is shown on the multi-information display

1

2

3

Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.

After the hybrid system has cooled down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

1

2

Radiator

Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

4

1

2

3

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and

“LOW” lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir

“FULL” line

“LOW” line

5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

8


600

6


Start the hybrid system and check for the multi-information display.

If the message does not disappear:

Stop the hybrid system and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the message is not displayed:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle


Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.

● After the hybrid system has been turned off, check that the “READY” indicator is off.

When the hybrid system is operating, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or the cooling fan may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fan, which may lead to fingers or clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious injury.

● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot.

High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.



601

NOTICE

■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant

Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently.

Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.

■ To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).

● Do not use any coolant additive.

8


602


If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

1

2

3

4

5

Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.

Restart the hybrid system.

Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■

When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press to turn off TRAC.



603

WARNING

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.

The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the hybrid transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.

● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

8


604



605


9

9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) .......... 606

Fuel information ................ 615

Tire information ................. 618

9-2. Customization

Customizable features ...... 631

9-3. Initialization

Items to initialize ............... 641


606

9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheelbase

Front and rear tread

* 1

Vehicles without front license plate garnish

181.1 in. (4600 mm)

Vehicles with front license plate garnish

181.3 in. (4605 mm)

72.6 in. (1845 mm)

Without the roof luggage carrier

With the roof luggage carrier

65.9 in. (1675 mm)

66.3 in. (1685 mm) * 2

67.1 in. (1705 mm)

67.5 in. (1715 mm)

* 2

104.7 in. (2660 mm)

17-inch tires

18-inch tires

61.8 in. (1570 mm)

61.4 in. (1560 mm)

Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants + luggage)

Trailer Weight Rating * 3

(Trailer weight + cargo weight)

* 1

: Unladen vehicle

* 2

: Vehicles with raised vehicle height

* 3

: Vehicles for trailer towing.(

→ P. 183)

900 lb. (410 kg)

1750 lb. (795 kg)


9-1. Specifications

607

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your

Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.

This number is stamped under the right-hand front seat.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

9


608

9-1. Specifications

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Valve clearance

Drive belt tension

Fuel

Fuel type

Octane Rating

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FXE)

4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline

3.54

×

3.86 in. (90.0

×

98.0 mm)

152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm

3

)

Automatic adjustment

Unleaded gasoline only

87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher

14.8 gal. (56 L, 12.3 Imp.gal.)

Electric motor (traction motor)

Type

Maximum output

Maximum torque

Front Rear

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

105 kW

199 ft•lbf

(270 N•m, 27.5 kgf•m)

50 kW

103 ft•lbf

(139 N•m, 14.2 kgf•m)


9-1. Specifications

609

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Type

Voltage

Capacity

Quantity

Overall voltage

Nickel-Metal hydride battery

7.2 V/module

6.5 Ah (3HR)

34 modules

244.8 V

Lubrication system

■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Reference * ])

With filter

Without filter

4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp.qt.)

4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp.qt.)

* : The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use

Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 is not available,

SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.

However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

Outside temperature

9


610

9-1. Specifications

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity

(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

Cooling system

Capacity

Coolant type

Gasoline engine

Power control unit

7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Use either of the following:

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.


9-1. Specifications

Ignition system

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSO FK16HR-A8

0.03 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

611

Electrical system

12-volt battery

Open voltage at 68 ° F

(20 ° C):

Charging rates

12.0 V or higher

(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all lights are turned off.)

5 A max.

Hybrid transaxle

Fluid capacity

*

Front

Rear

4.0 qt. (3.8 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)

1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*

: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.

If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ Hybrid transaxle fluid type

Using transaxle fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transaxle accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transaxle of your vehicle.

9


612

9-1. Specifications

Brakes

Pedal clearance

Pedal free play

* 1

Brake pad wear limit

Parking brake lever travel

* 2

Parking brake lining wear limit

4.13 in. (105 mm) Min.

0.04

⎯

0.24 in. (1

⎯

6 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

7 ⎯ 10 clicks

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

* 1

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,

50 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating.

* 2

: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45 lbf (200 N,

20 kgf)

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)


9-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels

 Type A

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

225/65R17 102H, T165/80R17 104M (spare)

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

2

or bar)

Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

2

Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

or bar)

2

or bar)

17 × 7 J, 17 × 4T (spare)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

613

 Type B

Tire size



Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

225/65R17 102H


2

or bar)


2


or bar)

2

or bar)

17 × 7 J

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

 Type C

Tire size



Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

235/55R18 100H, T165/80R17 104M (spare)


2

or bar)


2

or bar)


2

or bar)

18 × 7 1/2J, 17 × 4T (spare)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

9


614

9-1. Specifications

Light bulbs

Exterior

Interior

Light bulbs

Headlights/daytime running lights (halogen headlights)

Fog lights

Bulb No.

9012

⎯

Front turn signal lights/parking lights (halogen headlights)

Front turn signal lights

(LED headlights)

Front side marker lights

Stop/tail lights and rear side marker lights (bulb type)

Tail lights (bulb type)

Rear turn signal lights

Back-up lights

License plate lights

Vanity lights

Interior lights (front)/ personal lights

Interior light (rear)

Luggage compartment light

7444NA

7444NA

⎯

7443

⎯

⎯

921

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

W

55

19

28/8

28

5

21/5

5

21

16

5

8

5

8

5

A: HIR2 halogen bulbs

B: H16 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

E: Double end bulbs

D

D

D

D

D

C

C

D

D

E

D

Type

A

B

C


9-1. Specifications

615

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.

Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of

ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A..

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

■ Gasoline quality standards

● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.

● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.

● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.

9


616

9-1. Specifications

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.

● Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline

Gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasoline, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.

Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol.

DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than

15% ethanol.

that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled

E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than

15% ethanol).

(30% ethanol)

(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.


9-1. Specifications

617

■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

■ If your engine knocks

● Consult your Toyota dealer.

● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality

● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.

At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

9


618

9-1. Specifications

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

 Full-size tire

 Compact spare tire


9-1. Specifications

619

1

2

3

4

5

Tire size

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Location of treadwear indicators

(

→

P. 621)

(

→

P. 620)

( →

P. 501)

Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

7

8

6

A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire.

A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

( →

P. 625)

(

→

P. 625)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Uniform tire quality grading 9

10

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Summer tires or all season tires (

→

P. 505)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.

11 “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

9


620

9-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

 Type A  Type B

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

DOT symbol *

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

8 Manufacturer’s code

*

: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.


9-1. Specifications

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

2

3

1

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use

(P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

4

5

6

7

Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

■ Tire dimensions

1

2

3

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

621

9


622

9-1. Specifications

Tire section names

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer


9-1. Specifications

623

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the

U.S. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■ DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

■ Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

9


624

9-1. Specifications

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.


9-1. Specifications

625

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment

(whether installed or not)

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(c) Vehicle capacity weight

(d) Production options weight

Normal occupant weight

Occupant distribution

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 * that follows

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 * below

9


626

9-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Production options weight

Rim

Meaning

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim type designation

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.

(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Weather side

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 * below), and dividing by two

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Bead

Bead separation

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead


9-1. Specifications

627

Tire related term

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

CT

Meaning

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

Groove

Innerliner

Innerliner separation

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

9


628

9-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Light truck (LT) tire

Meaning

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

Maximum load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Overall width

Passenger car tire

Ply

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire


9-1. Specifications

629

Tire related term

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

Snow tire

Test rim

Tread

Tread rib

Tread separation

Treadwear indicators

(TWI)

Meaning

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-

1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in

ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for

Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall

)

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

*

: Table 1

⎯

Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

9


630

9-1. Specifications

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

11 through 15

16 through 20

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

2

3

5

7

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat


9-2. Customization

631

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed by using the multi-information display, Entune

Premium Audio with Navigation or Entune Audio, or at your

Toyota dealer.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Customizing vehicle features

When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a safe place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set.

Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.

■ Changing using Entune Premium Audio with Navigation or

Entune Audio Plus

1

2

1

Press the “APPS” button.

Select “Setup” on the “Apps” screen and select “Vehicle”.

■ Changing using Entune Audio


2 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

■ Changing using the multi-information display

1

2

Press or of the meter control switch and select the multi-information display.

on

Press or of the meter control switch and then press .

9


632

9-2. Customization

2

3

1

Customizable features

Vehicles with Entune Premium Audio with Navigation or Entune

Audio: Settings that can be changed using Entune Premium Audio with Navigation or Entune Audio

Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display

Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

■ Instrument cluster (

→

P. 88, 99)

Language

Units *

*

Function

EV indicator

Pop-up display

Accent color

Default setting

English miles

(MPG US)

On

On

Light blue

Customized setting

French

Spanish

1 2 3

O O — miles

(MPG Imperial) km (L/100 km) km (km/L)

Off

O O —

— O —

— O — Off

Blue

Orange

Yellow

O O —

*

: The default setting varies according to countries.


9-2. Customization

633

■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (if equipped)

(

→

P. 255)

Function

Steering Assist

Default setting

On

Customized setting

Off

Alert sensitivity

Vehicle sway warning

Vehicle sway warning sensitivity

Standard

On

Standard

High

Off

Low

High

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped) (

→

P. 240)

1 2 3

— O —

— O —

— O —

— O —

Function

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

Default setting

On

Customized setting

Off

1 2 3

— O —

Alert timing

(Middle)

(Far)

— O —

(Near)

9


634

9-2. Customization

■ Power back door * 1

(

→

P. 119)

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

1 2 3

Touchless Sensor

* 1, 2

On Off — O O

Opening angle

Operation buzzer volume

5

3

1 to 4

User setting

* 3

— O —

1

2

— O —

Operation buzzer

All on

When the back door begins to operate: On

While the back door is operating: Off

All off

When the back door begins to operate: Off

While the back door is operating: On

— — O

* 1

: If equipped

* 2

: When the towing hitch is installed, the Touchless Sensor does not work

* 3

: The open position is set by the power back door switch ( →

P. 124)


9-2. Customization

635

■ Door lock (

→

P. 113, 590)

Function

Unlocking using a mechanical key

Default setting

On (Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps)

Customized setting

1 2 3

Off (All doors unlocked in one step)

— — O

Speed linked door locking function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Driver’s door linked door unlocking function

Off

On

On

Off

On

Off

Off

On

O — O

O — O

O — O

O — O

9


636

9-2. Customization

■ Smart key system (

→

P. 108) and wireless remote control

(

→

P. 113, 119, 136)

Function

Operation signal (buzzer)

*

Default setting

Level 5

Customized setting

Off

Level 1 to 7

1 2 3

O — O

Operation signal (emergency flashers)

On Off O — O

Time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked

60 seconds

30 seconds

120 seconds

— — O

Open door reminder buzzer

(When locking the vehicle)

On Off

Unlocking operation

Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

On

All doors unlocked in one step

Alarm (panic mode) Off

* : The default setting varies according to on some models.

■ Smart key system (

→

P. 113, 119, 136)

— — O

O — O

— — O

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

1 2 3

Smart key system

Select doors to unlock

*

On Off

Number of consecutive door lock operations

2 times

As many as desired

*

: Settings that can be changed by electronic key (

→ P. 117)

O — O

Driver’s door All the doors O — O

— — O


9-2. Customization

■ Wireless remote control (

→

P. 108, 113, 119)

Opening operation of power back door

*

Function

Wireless remote control

Default setting

On

Press and hold

637

Customized setting

Off

Off

One short press

Press twice

1 2 3

— — O

— — O

*

: If equipped

■ Moon roof (if equipped) (

→

P. 164)

Function

Default setting

On

Customized setting

Off

1 2 3

— — O Automatic operation

■ Turn signal lever (

→

P. 211)

Function

Time of flashing of the lane change signal flashers

Default setting

3

Customized setting

Off

6

7

4

5

1 2 3

— — O

9


638

9-2. Customization

■ Automatic light control system (

→

P. 213, 217)

Function

Light sensor sensitivity

Automatic High Beam

Default setting

0

On

Time elapsed before the headlights automatically turn off after the doors are closed

30 seconds

Customized setting

-2 to 2

Off

Off

60 seconds

90 seconds

1 2 3

O — O

— — O

O — O

■ Lights ( →

P. 213)

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Daytime running lights

*

On Off

*

: U.S.A. only

■ Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) (

→

P. 280)

1 2 3

O — O

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

1 2 3

Detection distance of the front center sensor

Detection distance of the rear center sensor

Far

Far

Near

Near

O — O

O — O

Buzzer volume 3 1 to 5 O — O

Display setting

(when Intuitive parking assist is operating)

All sensors displayed

Display off O — O

■ Automatic air conditioning system (

→

P. 426)

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

1 2 3

Switching between outside air and recirculated air mode linked to “AUTO” switch operation

A/C Auto switch operation

On

On

Off

Off

— — O

O — O


9-2. Customization

639

■ Illumination (

→

P. 436)

Function

Interior lights illumination control

Default setting

On

Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off

15 seconds

Customized setting

1 2 3

Off — — O

Off

7.5 seconds O * — O

30 seconds

Off — — O

Operation after the power switch is turned off

Operation when the doors are unlocked

Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person

*

: If equipped

■ Seat belt reminder (

→

P. 30)

Function

Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer

On

On

On

Default setting

On

Off

Off

— — O

— — O

Customized setting

1 2 3

Off — — O

9


640

9-2. Customization

■ Vehicle customization

● When the speed linked door locking function and shift position linked door locking function are both on, the door lock operates as follows.

• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be locked.

• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the Speed linked door locking function would not operate.

• If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the Speed linked door locking function will operate.

● When the smart key system is off, the selecting doors to unlock cannot be customized.

● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the automatic door lock function activates, the signals will be generated in accordance with the operation signal (buzzers) and the operation signal (emergency flashers) settings.

WARNING

■ During customization

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide

(CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■ During customization

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while customizing features.


9-3. Initialization

641

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

Item

Power back door

(if equipped)

Moon roof

(if equipped)

When to initialize

• After reconnecting or changing the 12-volt battery

• After changing a fuse



Message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)

• After the maintenance is performed

Tire pressure warning system

(If equipped)

Toyota parking assist monitor (if equipped)

• When changing the tire size

Panoramic view monitor (if equipped)



Reference

P. 126

P. 165

P. 477

P. 503

Refer to

“NAVIGATION

AND

MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM

OWNER’S

MANUAL”

9


642

9-3. Initialization


643

For owners

10

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners........................ 644

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French) ............................... 645

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

(in French) ............................... 647


644

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

(Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.


645

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in

English.

Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité

● Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre entièrement l’épaule; elle ne doit cependant pas toucher le cou ni glisser de l’épaule.

● Placez la ceinture abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.

● Réglez la position du dossier. Tenez-vous assis bien au fond du siège, le dos droit.

● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Lorsque vous utilisez la ceinture de sécurité centrale arrière

N’utilisez pas la ceinture de sécurité du siège central arrière si l’une des boucles est retirée. Attacher une seule boucle pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de freinage ou de dérapage brusques, ou d’accident.

10


646

Entretien et soin

■ Ceintures de sécurité

Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon doux et de l’eau tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer qu’elles ne présentent pas d’usure excessive, d’effilochage ou de coupures.

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité

Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas de coupures, d’effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N’utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Les ceintures de sécurité endommagées ne peuvent pas protéger les occupants contre les blessures graves, voire mortelles.


647

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

10


648

◆

Coussins gonflables SRS avant

1 Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant

Peuvent aider à protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs

2 Coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux du conducteur

Peut aider à protéger le conducteur

3 Coussin gonflable SRS du coussin de siège

Peut aider à retenir le passager avant

◆

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau

4

5

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux

Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant

Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau

●

Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux

●

Peuvent empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en cas de tonneaux


Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

649

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

9

Capteurs d’impact latéral (portières avant)

Coussin gonflable du passager avant

Coussins gonflables en rideau

Coussin gonflable du coussin de siège du passager avant

Coussins gonflables latéraux

Voyants “AIR BAG ON” et

“AIR BAG OFF”

Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du passager avant

Lampe témoin SRS

Coussin gonflable du conducteur

15

16

10

11

Capteurs d’impact latéral

(arrière)

Limiteurs de force et dispositifs de tension des ceintures de sécurité

12

13

Capteur de position du siège du conducteur

Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du conducteur

14 Coussin gonflable de protection des genoux du conducteur

Capteurs d’impact avant

Système de classification de l’occupant du siège du passager avant (ECU et capteurs)

17 Module de capteur de coussin gonflable

10


650

Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont la conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules

à moteur américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable (ECU) contrôle le déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des informations obtenues des capteurs et d’autres éléments affichés dans le diagramme des composants du système ci-dessus.

Ces informations comprennent des données relatives à la gravité de l’accident et aux occupants. Au moment du déploiement des coussins gonflables, une réaction chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs de coussin gonflable et les coussins gonflables se remplissent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique pour aider à limiter le mouvement des occupants.


651

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les coussins gonflables SRS.

Les négliger pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité de la manière appropriée.

Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être utilisés avec les ceintures de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, fait les recommandations suivantes :

La zone à risque du coussin gonflable du conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50

à 75 mm) de la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable. Pour assurer une marge de sécurité suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable. Cette distance est mesurée depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à votre sternum. Si maintenant vous vous tenez assis à moins de 10 in.

(250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs manières :

• Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d’atteindre encore aisément les pédales.

• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.

Même si les véhicules sont conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même si leur siège se trouve complètement vers l’avant, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier du siège vers l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est moindre après avoir incliné le dossier de votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et non glissant pour être assis plus haut ou relevez le siège si cette option est disponible sur votre véhicule.

• Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers votre tête et vers votre cou.

Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la

NHTSA, tout en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, ainsi que la vue sur les commandes du tableau de bord.

10


652

AVERTISSEMENT


● Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a

été reliée à la boucle des ceintures de sécurité des sièges avant sans avoir aussi été attachée à la plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécurité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant considéreront que le conducteur et le passager avant portent tout de même leur ceinture de sécurité même si les ceintures de sécurité ne sont pas attachées.

Les coussins gonflables SRS avant peuvent alors ne pas s’activer correctement lors d’une collision, ce qui représente un risque de blessures graves, voire mortelles. Assurez-vous de toujours porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.

● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves, voire mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement retenu à l’aide d’un dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Toyota recommande vivement de placer et d’attacher correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sécuritaires pour les bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.

● N’installez jamais un dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route sur le siège du passager avant, même si le voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.

En cas d’accident, la force et la vitesse de déploiement du coussin gonflable du passager avant pourraient infliger à l’enfant des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos

à la route était installé sur le siège du passager avant.


AVERTISSEMENT


● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas sur la planche de bord.

● Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un passager avant.

● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant tenir des objets sur leurs genoux.

● Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur le brancard de pavillon, ni sur les montants avant, latéraux ou arrière.

● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face

à la portière sur le siège du passager ni sortir la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.

● Ne fixez rien et n’appuyez rien sur des zones telles que la planche de bord, le tampon de volant et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord.

Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS du conducteur, du passager avant ou de protection des genoux se déploient.

653

10


654

AVERTISSEMENT


● Ne fixez rien sur des zones telles que les portières, le pare-brise, les glaces de portières, les montants avant ou arrière, le brancard de pavillon et la poignée de maintien.

● N’accrochez pas de cintres ni d’objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vêtements. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS en rideau.

● Si un recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer.

● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et le coussin gonflable SRS du coussin de siège se déploient, car ces accessoires pourraient entraver le déploiement des coussins SRS. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux et le coussin gonflable du coussin de siège de se déployer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provoquer accidentellement le déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux et du coussin gonflable du coussin de siège, occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez pas une pression importante à l’emplacement des composants des coussins gonflables SRS.

Ces actions peuvent entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.

● Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.

● Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace pour laisser entrer l’air, ou quittez le véhicule si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez tous les résidus afin d’éviter les irritations cutanées.

● Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, tels que le tampon de volant et les garnitures des montants avant et arrière, sont endommagés ou fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire

Toyota.

● Ne placez aucun objet, par exemple un coussin, sur le siège du passager avant. Cela disperserait le poids du passager, ce qui empêcherait le capteur de le détecter correctement. Cela pourrait empêcher le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS du passager avant en cas de collision.


655

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suivantes sans d’abord consulter votre concessionnaire Toyota. Les coussins gonflables SRS pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, ce qui serait susceptible d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS

● Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou du capitonnage des sièges, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des brancards de pavillon

● Réparations ou modifications de l’aile avant, du pare-chocs avant ou du côté de l’habitacle

● Installation d’une protection de calandre (barre safari, barre kangourou, etc.), de lames de déneigement, de treuils ou d’un porte-bagages de toit

● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule

● Installation d’appareils électroniques tels qu’un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un lecteur de CD

● Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques réduites

10


656


657

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting) .................... 658

Alphabetical index ..................... 661

For vehicles with Entune Premium Audio with Navigation or Entune Audio Plus, refer to the “NAVIGATION

AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the equipment listed below.

• Navigation system

• Audio system

• Rear view monitor system

• Toyota parking assist monitor

• Panoramic view monitor


658

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

●

If you lose your mechanical keys, new mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. (

→

P. 109)

●

If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. ( → P. 112)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

●

Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? ( →

P. 518)

●

Is the power switch in ON mode?

When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. ( →

P. 199)

●

Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

●

The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (

→ P. 138)

The rear door cannot be opened

●

Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. (

→ P. 116)



659

If you think something is wrong

The hybrid system does not start

●

Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?

(

→ P. 198)

●

Is the shift lever in P? (

→

P. 198)

●

Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (

→ P. 136)

●

Is the steering wheel unlocked? (

→ P. 201)

●

Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?

In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary way.

(

→ P. 591)

●

Is the 12-volt battery discharged? ( →

P. 592)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal

●

Is the power switch in ON mode?

If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the power switch in ON mode:

→

P. 209

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the hybrid system is stopped

●

It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. ( →

P. 201)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

●

Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (

→

P. 161)

The power switch is turned off automatically

●

The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-

SORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for a period of time. ( →

P. 200)


660


A warning buzzer sounds during driving

●

The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (

→

P. 549)

●

The brake system warning light is on

Is the parking brake released? ( → P. 212)

Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.

(

→

P. 547, 556)

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

●

Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?

Check the message on the multi-information display. (

→

P. 556)

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

●

When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to

P. 547, 556.

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

●

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

(

→

P. 576)

The vehicle becomes stuck

●

Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (

→

P. 602)


Alphabetical index

661

Alphabetical index

A

A/C ............................................ 426

Air conditioning filter ............. 516


system ................................ 426

Micro dust and pollen filter.... 428

ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System) .................................. 308

Function ................................ 308

Warning light......................... 548

Air conditioning filter .............. 516

Air conditioning system.......... 426



system ................................ 426

Micro dust and pollen filter.... 428

Airbags ....................................... 38

Airbag operating conditions .... 46

Airbag precautions for your child .............................. 41

Airbag warning light .............. 547

Correct driving posture ........... 28

Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions ............. 46

Curtain shield airbag precautions........................... 43


classification system............. 51

General airbag precautions .... 41

Locations of airbags................ 38

Modification and disposal of airbags.............................. 45

Side airbag operating

conditions ............................. 46

Side airbag precautions .......... 43

Side and curtain shield airbags operating

conditions ............................. 46

Side and curtain shield airbags precautions .............. 43

SRS airbag instructions for

Canadian owners ............... 647

SRS airbags ........................... 38

All-wheel drive system............ 309

Anchor brackets ........................ 64

Antenna

Radio .................................... 350

Smart key system ................. 136

Anti-lock brake system

(ABS) ...................................... 308

Function................................ 308

Warning light......................... 548

Approach warning


control ................................ 271

Armrest..................................... 455

Assist grips.............................. 456

Audio input ...................... 334, 368

Audio system........................... 329

Audio input.................... 334, 368

AUX port/USB port ....... 334, 368

Bluetooth

®

audio .................. 381

CD player.............................. 351

iPod ...................................... 358

MP3/WMA disc ..................... 351

Optimal use .......................... 348

Portable music player ........... 334

Radio .................................... 349

Steering wheel audio switch ................................. 333

USB memory ........................ 363

Automatic air conditioning system



system................................ 426

Automatic High Beam ............. 217

Automatic light control system.................................... 216

AUX port........................... 334, 368

Auxiliary box............................ 442


662

Alphabetical index

B

Back door

Back door.............................. 119

Jam protection function......... 126

Power back door................... 122

Touchless power back

door .................................... 121

Wireless remote control ........ 108

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 532

Wattage ................................ 614

Battery (12-volt battery)

Battery checking ................... 496


is discharged ...................... 592

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 317

Warning message................. 567

Battery (traction battery)........... 79

Bluetooth

®

................................ 414

Audio system ........................ 381

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone) ............. 383


®

device ................................. 374

Selecting a Bluetooth

®

device ................................. 376

Wireless

communication ................... 369

Bluetooth

®

audio ..................... 381

Bluetooth

®

phone

(Entune Audio)

Deleting the call history......... 400

Making a call......................... 385

Managing the contacts.......... 400

Message function.................. 392

Phone settings ...................... 398

Receiving a call..................... 388

Speaking on the phone......... 389

Bottle holders .......................... 442

Brake

Fluid...................................... 494

Parking brake ....................... 212

Warning light/

message..................... 547, 557

Brake assist ............................. 308

Break-in tips............................. 169

Brightness control

Instrument panel light

control .................................. 94

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)....... 298

Blind Spot Monitor

function............................... 302

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function............................... 305

C

Care .................................. 470, 473

Aluminum wheels ................. 471

Exterior ................................. 470

Interior .................................. 473

Radar sensor ........................ 301

Seat belts.............................. 474

Cargo capacity......................... 606

Cargo hooks ............................ 443

Catch protection function....... 162

CD player.................................. 351

Chains ...................................... 317

Child restraint system............... 59

Booster seats, definition ......... 59

Booster seats, installation....... 70

Convertible seats,

definition............................... 59

Convertible seats,

installation ............................ 66


classification system ............ 51

Infant seats, definition............. 59


Alphabetical index

663

Infant seats, installation .......... 66

Installing CRS with

LATCH system ..................... 64

Installing CRS with seat

belts...................................... 66

Installing CRS with top tether strap ........................... 71

Child safety ................................ 58

12-volt battery precautions................. 499, 595

Airbag precautions.................. 41

Back door precautions .......... 129

Child restraint system ............. 59

How your child should

wear the seat belt ................. 34

Installing child restraints ......... 63

Moon roof precautions .......... 166

Power window lock

switch ................................. 161

Power window precautions......................... 163

Rear door child-protectors .... 116

Removed key battery precautions......................... 519

Seat belt extender precautions........................... 37

Seat belt precautions .............. 35

Seat heater precautions........ 434

Child-protectors....................... 116

Cleaning ........................... 470, 473

Aluminum wheels.................. 471

Exterior ................................. 470

Interior................................... 473

Radar sensor ................ 301, 567

Seat belts.............................. 474

Clock........................................... 99

Coat hooks ............................... 455

Compass .................................. 464

Condenser................................ 493

Console box ............................. 440

Coolant ..................................... 492

Capacity................................ 610

Checking............................... 492


before winter ...................... 317

Cooling system

Hybrid system

overheating ........................ 597

Cruise control

Cruise control ....................... 276


control ................................ 264

Cup holders ............................. 441

Curtain shield airbags............... 38

Customizable features ............ 631

D

Daytime running light

system.................................... 215

Deck board............................... 452

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 429

Rear window......................... 429

Windshield ............................ 428

Dimension ................................ 606

Dinghy towing.......................... 197

Display


control ................................ 264

Energy monitor/consumption

screen ................................ 101

Intuitive parking assist .......... 281


with steering control) .......... 259

Multi-information display......... 97

Toyota parking assist monitor

*

............................. 281

Warning message................. 556

Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 483

*



664

Alphabetical index

Doors

Automatic door locking

and unlocking system......... 116

Back door.............................. 119

Door glasses......................... 161

Door lock....................... 113, 119

Open door warning

buzzer................................. 137

Open door warning

message............................. 558

Outside rear view mirrors...... 158

Rear door child-protectors .... 116

Side doors............................. 113

Driver’s seat belt reminder

light......................................... 549

Driver’s seat position

memory .................................. 149

Driving ...................................... 168

Break-in tips.......................... 169

Correct posture ....................... 28

Driving in the rain.................. 169

Driving mode select

switch ................................. 206


tips...................................... 314

Procedures ........................... 168

Winter drive tips .................... 317

Driving position memory ........ 149

Dynamic radar cruise

control .................................... 264

Function ................................ 264

Warning message................. 558

E

ECB (Electronically

Controlled Brake System) .... 308

Eco drive mode........................ 206

EDR (Event data recorder)........ 11

E-Four ....................................... 309

Electric Power Steering

(EPS) ...................................... 308

Function................................ 308

Warning light......................... 548

Electronically Controlled

Brake System (ECB) ............. 308

Electronic key .......................... 108

Battery-saving function ......... 137


not operate properly ........... 590

Replacing the battery............ 518

Emergency, in case of

If a warning buzzer

sounds................................ 547

If a warning light

turns on .............................. 547


displayed ............................ 556

If the 12-volt battery is

discharged.......................... 592



If the hybrid system will not

start .................................... 588

If you have a flat tire ............. 576

If you lose your keys............. 109

If you think something is

wrong ................................. 546

If your vehicle becomes

stuck................................... 602

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ......................... 539

If your vehicle needs to be

towed.................................. 540

If your vehicle overheats....... 597

Emergency flashers ................ 538

Energy monitor/consumption

screen .................................... 101


Alphabetical index

665

Engine

Accessory mode ................... 199

Compartment ........................ 488

Engine switch

(power switch) .................... 198

Hood ..................................... 485

How to start the hybrid

system ................................ 198

Identification number ............ 608


start .................................... 588

Ignition switch

(power switch) .................... 198

Overheating .......................... 597

Power switch......................... 198

Engine coolant......................... 492

Capacity................................ 610

Checking............................... 492


before winter....................... 317

Engine oil ................................. 489

Capacity................................ 609

Checking............................... 489


before winter....................... 317

Engine switch

(power switch) ....................... 198

Entune Audio ........................... 329

AUX Port/USB port ............... 334

Basic Audio Operations ........ 335

CD player.............................. 351

iPod....................................... 358


®

Audio .................................. 381

Radio .................................... 349

Steering wheel audio switches.............................. 333

USB memory ........................ 363

Using a Bluetooth

®

Phone ................................. 383

Using the AUX port ............... 368

Entune Audio Plus *

EPS (Electric Power

Steering) ................................ 308

Function................................ 308

Warning light......................... 548

EV drive mode ......................... 203

Event data recorder (EDR)........ 11

Exhaust gas precautions.......... 74

F

Flat tire ..................................... 576

Floor mats .................................. 26

Fluid

Brake .................................... 612

Hybrid transmission .............. 611

Washer ................................. 495

Fog lights ................................. 222

Replacing light bulbs ............ 527

Switch ................................... 222

Wattage ................................ 614

Front passenger occupant

classification system.............. 51

Front seats ............................... 144

Adjustment............................ 144

Cleaning ............................... 473

Correct driving posture ........... 28

Driving position memory ....... 149

Head restraints ..................... 151

Seat heaters ......................... 434

Seat position memory........... 149

Front side marker lights ......... 213

Light switch........................... 213


Wattage ................................ 614

Front turn signal lights ........... 211


Turn signal lever ................... 211

Wattage ................................ 614

*



666

Alphabetical index

Fuel ........................................... 608

Capacity................................ 608

Fuel gauge.............................. 93

Information............................ 615

Refueling............................... 230

Type...................................... 608

Warning light......................... 549

Fuel consumption

information ............................ 101

Fuel filler door.......................... 230

Refueling............................... 230

Fuses ........................................ 520

G

Garage door opener ................ 457

Gauges ....................................... 93

Glove box ................................. 440

Grocery bag hooks.................. 443

H

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone)................ 385

HD Radio

®

system

*

Head restraints ........................ 151

Headlights ................................ 213

Automatic High Beam ........... 217

Light switch ........................... 213


Wattage ................................ 614

Heaters


system ................................ 426

Heated steering wheel .......... 435

Seat heaters ......................... 435

Outside rear view mirrors...... 429

High mounted stoplight

Replacing.............................. 534

Hill-start assist control............ 308

Hood ......................................... 485

Hooks

Cargo hooks ......................... 443

Coat hooks ........................... 455

Grocery bag hooks ............... 443

Retaining hooks

(floor mat)............................. 26

Horn .......................................... 154

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Location .................................. 79

Specification ......................... 609

Hybrid battery (traction

battery) air vents ..................... 80

Hybrid system............................ 75

Emergency shut off

system.................................. 80

Energy monitor/

consumption screen ........... 101

EV drive mode ...................... 203

High voltage components ....... 79

Hybrid System Indicator ......... 95

Hybrid system

precautions........................... 79


tips...................................... 314


start .................................... 588

Overheating .......................... 597

Power (ignition) switch.......... 198

Regenerative braking ............. 77

Starting the hybrid system .... 198

Vehicle proximity notification

system.................................. 76

Hybrid System Indicator ........... 95

Hybrid transmission................ 205

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ..................... 209


Alphabetical index

667

I

I/M test ...................................... 482

Identification ............................ 607

Engine................................... 608

Vehicle .................................. 607

Ignition switch

(power switch) ....................... 198

Illuminated entry system ........ 438

Immobilizer system ................... 84

Indicators ................................... 88

Initialization

Items to initialize ................... 641

Maintenance ......................... 477

Moon roof.............................. 165

Power windows..................... 162

Tire pressure warning

system ................................ 503

Inside rear view mirror ............ 156

Instrument panel light

control ...................................... 94

Interior lights............................ 436

Switch ................................... 437

Wattage ................................ 614

Intuitive parking assist............ 280

J

Jack

Positioning a floor jack.......... 487

Vehicle-equipped

jack ..................................... 577

Jack handle ...................... 577, 581

Jam protection function

Moon roof.............................. 165

Power back door opener

and closer........................... 126

Power windows..................... 162

K

Keyless entry ................... 108, 136

Smart key system ................. 136

Wireless remote control........ 108

Keys.......................................... 108

Battery-saving function ......... 137

Electronic key ....................... 108



If you lose your keys............. 109

Key number plate ................. 108

Keyless entry ................ 108, 136

Keys...................................... 108

Power switch ........................ 198


Warning buzzer .................... 137


key...................................... 108

L

LATCH system........................... 64

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

with steering control) ........... 255

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever.............. 485

Hood lock release lever ........ 485

Shift lever.............................. 205


Wiper lever ........................... 223

License plate lights ................. 213

Light switch........................... 213


Wattage ................................ 614

*



668

Alphabetical index

Light

Automatic High Beam system ................................ 217

Fog light switch ..................... 222

Headlight switch.................... 213

Illuminated entry system ....... 438

Interior lights ......................... 437

Interior light list...................... 436

Luggage compartment

light..................................... 124

Personal lights ...................... 437



Vanity lights .......................... 453

Wattage ................................ 614

Light bulbs

Replacing.............................. 523

Wattage ................................ 614

Lock steering column ............. 201

M

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself

maintenance....................... 483

General maintenance ........... 479

Maintenance data ................. 606

Maintenance required

reminder message.............. 568

Maintenance

requirements ...................... 476

Malfunction indicator lamp..... 547

Meter ........................................... 93

Indicators ................................ 88

Instrument panel light

control................................... 94

Meters..................................... 93

Multi-information display ......... 97

Warning lights ....................... 547

Micro dust and pollen filter..... 428

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror .......... 156

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers ........................... 429


Vanity mirrors ....................... 453

Moon roof................................. 164

Jam protection function ........ 165

Operation.............................. 164

MP3 disc................................... 351

Multi-information display.......... 97


control ................................ 264

Energy monitor/consumption

screen ................................ 101




Switching the display .............. 98

Warning messages............... 556

N

Navigation system

*

Noise from under vehicle ........... 8

O

Odometer ................................... 93

Oil

Engine oil.............................. 609

Opener

Back door ............................. 119

Fuel filler door....................... 232

Hood ..................................... 485

Outside rear view mirrors....... 158

Adjusting and folding ............ 158

Blind Spot Monitor ................ 298


defoggers ........................... 429

Outside temperature display.... 93

Overheating, Engine ............... 597


Alphabetical index

669

P

Parking assist sensors

(intuitive parking assist)....... 280

Parking brake........................... 212

Operation .............................. 212

Parking brake engaged

warning buzzer ................... 547

Warning message................. 561

Parking lights........................... 213

Light switch ........................... 213

Replacing light bulbs..... 526, 534

Wattage ................................ 614

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

Enabling/disabling the

system ................................ 245

Function ................................ 240

Warning light......................... 548

Warning message................. 564

Personal lights......................... 436

Switch ................................... 437

Wattage ................................ 614

Power back door opener

and closer .............................. 119

Power control unit coolant ..... 492

Capacity................................ 610

Checking............................... 492


before winter....................... 317

Power outlet ............................. 454

Power steering (Electric

Power Steering system) ....... 308

Warning light......................... 548

Power switch............................ 198

Power windows........................ 161

Catch protection function ...... 162

Jam protection function......... 162

Operation .............................. 161

Window lock switch............... 161

Pre-Collision System (PCS)

Enabling/disabling the

system................................ 245

Function................................ 240

Warning light......................... 548

Warning message................. 564

R

Radar cruise control (dynamic

radar cruise control) ............. 264

Radiator.................................... 493

Radio ........................................ 349

Radio Broadcast Data

System (RBDS)

*

Rear passengers’ seat

belt reminder light................. 549

Rear seat .................................. 146

Adjustment............................ 146

Folding down the rear

seatbacks ........................... 147

Rear side marker lights........... 213

Light switch........................... 213


Wattage ................................ 614

Rear turn signal lights ............ 211



Wattage ................................ 614

Rear view mirror



Rear view monitor system...... 288

Rear window defogger............ 429

Rear window wiper.................. 227

Refueling .................................. 230

Capacity................................ 608

Fuel types ............................. 608

Opening the fuel tank cap..... 232

Regenerative braking................ 77

*



670

Alphabetical index

Replacing

Electronic key battery ........... 518

Fuses .................................... 520

Light bulbs ............................ 523

Tires...................................... 576


battery ................................ 518

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners...................... 644

Resetting the maintenance

required reminder light......... 477

Road accident cautions ............ 82

S

Seat belt reminder light........... 549

Seat belts.................................... 30

Adjusting the seat belt ............ 33

Automatic Locking

Retractor............................... 34

Child restraint system

installation ............................ 63

Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt........................ 474

Emergency Locking

Retractor............................... 34

How to wear your seat belt ..... 30

How your child should

wear the seat belt ................. 34

Pregnant women, proper seat belt use ......................... 35

Reminder light and buzzer.... 549

Seat belt extender................... 34

Seat belt instructions for

Canadian owners ............... 645

Seat belt pretensioners........... 33

SRS warning light ................. 547

Seat heaters ............................. 434

Seat position memory ............. 149

Seating capacity ...................... 182

Seats................................. 144, 146

Adjustment............................ 144

Adjustment precautions ........ 145

Child seats/child restraint

system installation................ 63

Cleaning ............................... 473

Driving position memory ....... 149

Folding down the rear

seatbacks ........................... 147

Head restraint ....................... 151

Properly sitting in the seat ...... 28

Seat heaters ......................... 434

Seat position memory........... 149

Sensor

Automatic headlight system................................ 216





Radar sensor ........................ 235

Rain-sensing windshield

wipers................................. 225

Touchless sensor ................. 121

Service reminder indicators ..... 88

Shift lever



shifted from P ..................... 209

Shift lock system..................... 208

Shopping bag hooks............... 443

Side airbags ............................... 38

Side marker lights ................... 213

Light switch........................... 213

Replacing light bulbs .... 527, 530

Wattage ................................ 614

Side mirrors ............................. 158

Adjusting and folding ............ 158

Blind Spot Monitor ................ 298

Heaters ................................. 429

Side turn signal lights............. 211




Alphabetical index

671

Smart key system .................... 136

Antenna location ................... 136

Entry functions .............. 113, 119

Starting the hybrid system .... 198

Snow tires ................................ 319

Spare tire .................................. 576

Inflation pressure .................. 613

Storage location.................... 577

Spark plug ................................ 611

Specifications .......................... 606

Speedometer.............................. 93

Sport mode............................... 206

Steering lock ............................ 201

Steering wheel ......................... 154

Adjustment............................ 154

Audio switches...................... 333

Heated steering wheel .......... 435

Telephone switches .............. 397

Stop/tail lights


Wattage ................................ 614

Storage feature ........................ 439

Stuck


stuck ................................... 602

Sun visors ................................ 453

Sunshade

Roof ...................................... 165

Switch

Audio remote control switches.............................. 333

Cruise control switch............. 276

Door lock switch.................... 115

Driving mode select

switch ................................. 206

Driving position memory

switches.............................. 149


control switch...................... 264

“ECO MODE” button............. 206

*


Emergency flashers

switch ................................. 538

Engine switch

(power switch) .................... 198

EV drive mode switch ........... 203

Fog light switch..................... 222

Garage door opener

switches ............................. 457

Heated steering wheel

switch ................................. 435

Ignition switch ....................... 198


LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) .......... 258

Light switches ....................... 213

Meter control switches............ 98

Moon roof switches............... 164


switches ............................. 158

Power back door opener

and closer switch................ 119

Power door lock switch......... 115

Power switch ........................ 198

Power window switch ........... 161

Rear window wiper and

washer switch..................... 227

Rear window and outside rear view mirror

defoggers switch ................ 429

Seat heater switches ............ 435

“SPORT” button.................... 206

Talk switch

*

.......................... 420

Telephone switches.............. 397


reset switch ........................ 502

VSC OFF switch ................... 310

Window lock switch .............. 161

Windshield wipers and

washer switch..................... 223


672

Alphabetical index

T

Tail lights.................................. 213

Light switch ........................... 213


Wattage ................................ 614

Talk switch

*

Telephone switches ................ 397

Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system ................. 84

Tire inflation pressure............. 613

Maintenance data ................. 613

Warning light......................... 549

Tire information ....................... 618

Glossary................................ 625

Size....................................... 621

Tire identification number ..... 620

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading............................... 623

Tire pressure warning

system.................................... 502

Function ................................ 502

Initializing .............................. 503

Installing tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters......................... 502

Registering ID codes ............ 504


reset switch ........................ 502

Warning light......................... 549

Tires.......................................... 501

Chains .................................. 317

Checking............................... 501

If you have a flat tire ............. 576

Inflation pressure .................. 613

Information............................ 618

Replacing.............................. 576

Rotating tires ........................ 502

Size....................................... 613

Snow tires............................. 319

Spare tire .............................. 576


system................................ 502

Warning light......................... 549

Tools......................................... 577

Top tether strap ......................... 71

Total load capacity .................. 606

Touchless power back

door ........................................ 121

Towing

Dinghy towing ....................... 197

Emergency towing ................ 542

Towing eyelet ....................... 542

Trailer Sway Control ............. 309

Trailer towing ........................ 183

Toyota Safety Sense P............ 233

TRAC (Traction Control) ......... 308

Trailer Sway Control ............... 309

Trailer towing........................... 183

Transmission



shifted from P ..................... 209

Selecting the driving

mode .................................. 206

Trip meters................................. 93

Troubleshooting ...................... 658

Turn signal lights .................... 211

Replacing light

bulbs................... 526, 530, 534


Wattage ................................ 614


Alphabetical index

673

U

USB port ................................... 334

Utility vehicle precautions ...... 321

V

Vanity lights ............................. 453

Vanity lights .......................... 453

Wattage ................................ 614

Vanity mirrors .......................... 453

Vehicle data recordings ............ 10

Vehicle identification

number ................................... 607

Vehicle Stability Control

(VSC) ...................................... 308

Voice command system

*

....... 420

VSC (Vehicle Stability

Control) .................................. 308

W

Warning buzzers...................... 547

Brake system ........................ 547

Downshifting ......................... 208

Key reminder ................ 137, 571

Open back door .................... 558

Open door............................. 558

Open moon roof.................... 165

PCS ...................................... 240

Seat belt reminder ................ 549

Warning lights.......................... 547

ABS....................................... 548

Brake system ........................ 547

Electric power steering ......... 548

Low fuel level ........................ 549

Malfunction indicator lamp .... 547

PCS ...................................... 548

Seat belt reminder light......... 549

Slip indicator ......................... 549

SRS ...................................... 547

Tire pressure......................... 549

Warning messages.................. 556

Washer ..................................... 223

Checking............................... 495


before winter ...................... 317

Switch ................................... 223

Washing and waxing............... 470

Weights

Cargo capacity...................... 606

Load limits ............................ 182

Weights................................. 606

Wheels...................................... 513

Replacing wheels ................. 513

Size....................................... 613

Window glasses ...................... 161

Window lock switch ................ 161

Windows................................... 161

Power windows..................... 161

Rear window defogger.......... 429

Windshield wiper de-icer ........ 429

Windshield wipers................... 223

Intermittent windshield

wipers................................. 223

Rain-sensing windshield

wipers................................. 224

Winter driving tips................... 317


key .......................................... 108

Locking/Unlocking ................ 108


WMA disc ................................. 351

X

XM

®

Satellite Radio

*

*



674

Alphabetical index



Alphabetical index

675

676

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 485

Fuel filler door

P. 232

Hood lock release lever

P. 485

Fuel filler door opener

P. 232


P. 613

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

Fuel type

Cold tire inflation pressure

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill — reference)

Engine oil type

14.8 gal. (56 L, 12.3 Imp.gal.)

Unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

P. 608

P. 613

With filter

Without filter qt. (L, Imp.qt.)

4.6 (4.4, 3.9)

4.2 (4.0, 3.5)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

P. 609
